New Holland Discbine Mower-Conditioner H7230 H7330 Service Repair Manual (48068916) – New Holland

SERVICE MANUAL H7230 / H7330 Discbine® Mower-Conditioner

Printed in U.S.A. © 2016 CNH Industrial America LLC. All Rights Reserved.

New Holland is a trademark registered in the United States and many other countries, owned by or licensed to CNH Industrial N.V., its subsidiaries or affiliates.

Part number 48068916 English November 2016 Replaces part number 84301177

SERVICE MANUAL H7230 H7330

48068916 04/11/2016 EN

Contents INTRODUCTION Power Take-Off (PTO) ................................................................. 31 [31.201] Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.1 [31.214] Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.2 [31.215] Intermediate Power Take-Off (PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3 [31.220] Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.4 [31.225] Clutches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5

Hydraulic systems....................................................................... 35 [35.000] Hydraulic systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.1 [35.410] Header or attachment height system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.2 [35.415] Header or attachment tilting system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.3 [35.947] Frame positioning swinging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.4

Wheels ...................................................................................... 44 [44.530] Carrying and transport wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.1

Electrical systems ....................................................................... 55 [55.404] External lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55.1

Attachments/Headers.................................................................. 58 [58.110] Attachment/Header cutting mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58.1 [58.130] Attachment/Header frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58.2

Product feeding .......................................................................... 60 [60.120] Header drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60.1 [60.620] Roll conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60.2 [60.630] Flail conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60.3

48068916 04/11/2016

INTRODUCTION

48068916 04/11/2016

1

Contents INTRODUCTION Foreword - Important notice regarding equipment servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Safety rules - Personal safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Safety rules - Ecology and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Torque - Nominal tightening torques for normal assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Basic instructions - Shop and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Product identification - Machine orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

48068916 04/11/2016

2

INTRODUCTION

Foreword - Important notice regarding equipment servicing All repair and maintenance work listed in this manual must be carried out only by qualified dealership personnel, strictly complying with the instructions given, and using, whenever possible, the special tools.

Anyone who performs repair and maintenance operations without complying with the procedures provided herein shall be responsible for any subsequent damages.

The manufacturer and all the organizations of its distribution chain, including - without limitation - national, regional, or local dealers, reject any responsibility for damages caused by parts and/or components not approved by the manufacturer, including those used for the servicing or repair of the product manufactured or marketed by the manufacturer.

In any case, no warranty is given or attributed on the product manufactured or marketed by the manufacturer in case of damages caused by parts and/or components not approved by the manufacturer.

The manufacturer reserves the right to make improvements in design and changes in specifications at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold. Specifications, descriptions, and illustrative material herein are as accurate as known at time of publication but are subject to change without notice.

In case of questions, refer to your NEW HOLLAND Sales and Service Networks.

48068916 04/11/2016

3

INTRODUCTION

Safety rules Personal safety This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible death or injury.

Throughout this manual you will find the signal words DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION followed by special instructions. These precautions are intended for the personal safety of you and those working with you.

Read and understand all the safety messages in this manual before you operate or service the machine.

DANGER indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

FAILURE TO FOLLOW DANGER, WARNING, AND CAUTION MESSAGES COULD RESULT IN DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY. Machine safety NOTICE: Notice indicates a situation that, if not avoided, could result in machine or property damage.

Throughout this manual you will find the signal word Notice followed by special instructions to prevent machine or property damage. The word Notice is used to address practices not related to personal safety.

Information NOTE: Note indicates additional information that clarifies steps, procedures, or other information in this manual.

Throughout this manual you will find the word Note followed by additional information about a step, procedure, or other information in the manual. The word Note is not intended to address personal safety or property damage.

48068916 04/11/2016

4

INTRODUCTION

Safety rules - Personal safety General safety rules Use caution when you operate the machine on slopes. Raised equipment, full tanks and other loads will change the center of gravity of the machine. The machine can tip or roll over when near ditches and embankments or uneven surfaces.

Never permit anyone other than the operator to ride on the machine.

Never operate the machine under the influence of alcohol or drugs, or while you are otherwise impaired.

Hydraulic oil or diesel fuel leaking under pressure can penetrate the skin, causing serious injury or infection.

• DO NOT use your hand to check for leaks. Use a piece of cardboard or paper.

• Stop the engine, remove the key, and relieve the pressure before you connect or disconnect fluid lines.

• Make sure that all components are in good condition. Tighten all connections before you start the engine or pressurize the system.

• If hydraulic fluid or diesel fuel penetrates the skin, seek medical attention immediately.

• Continuous long term contact with hydraulic fluid may cause skin cancer. Avoid long term contact and wash the skin promptly with soap and water.

Keep clear of moving parts. Loose clothing, jewelry, watches, long hair, and other loose or hanging items can become entangled in moving parts.

Wear protective equipment when appropriate.

DO NOT attempt to remove material from any part of the machine while it is being operated or while components are in motion.

Make sure that all guards and shields are in good condition and properly installed before you operate the machine.

Never operate the machine with shields removed. Always close access doors or panels before you operate the machine.

A person or pet within the operating area of a machine can be struck or crushed by the machine or its equipment. DO NOT allow anyone to enter the work area.

Raised equipment and/or loads can fall unexpectedly and crush persons underneath. Never allow anyone to enter the area underneath raised equipment during operation.

Always keep windows, mirrors, all lighting, and Slow-Moving Vehicle (SMV) emblem clean to provide the best possible visibility while you operate the machine.

Operate controls only when seated in the operator’s seat, except for those controls expressly intended for use from other locations.

48068916 04/11/2016

5

INTRODUCTION

Before you leave the machine: 1. Park the machine on a firm, level surface.

2. Put all controls in neutral or park lock position.

3. Engage the parking brake. Use wheel chocks if required.

4. Lower all hydraulic equipment — Implements, header, etc.

5. Turn off the engine and remove the key.

WARNING Some components may continue to run down after you disengage drive systems.

Make sure all drive systems are fully disengaged.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W0113A

When, due to exceptional circumstances, you would decide to keep the engine running after you leave the operator’s station, then you must follow these precautions: 1. Bring the engine to low idle speed.

2. Disengage all drive systems.

3. Shift the transmission into neutral.

4. Apply the parking brake.

General maintenance safety Keep the area used for servicing the machine clean and dry. Clean up spilled fluids.

Service the machine on a firm, level surface.

Install guards and shields after you service the machine.

Close all access doors and install all panels after servicing the machine.

Do not attempt to clean, lubricate, clear obstructions, or make adjustments to the machine while it is in motion or while the engine is running.

Always make sure that working area is clear of tools, parts, other persons and pets before you start operating the machine.

Unsupported hydraulic cylinders can lose pressure and drop the equipment, causing a crushing hazard. Do not leave equipment in a raised position while parked or during service, unless the equipment is securely supported.

Jack or lift the machine only at jack or lift points indicated in this manual.

Incorrect towing procedures can cause accidents. When you tow a disabled machine follow the procedure in this manual. Use only rigid tow bars.

Stop the engine, remove the key, and relieve pressure before you connect or disconnect fluid lines.

Stop the engine and remove the key before you connect or disconnect electrical connections.

Replace damaged or worn tubes, hoses, electrical wiring, etc.

When welding, follow the instructions in the manual. Always disconnect the battery before you weld on the machine.

Always wash your hands after you handle battery components.

48068916 04/11/2016

6

INTRODUCTION

Wheels and tires Make sure that tires are correctly inflated. Do not exceed any recommended load or pressure. Follow the instructions in the manual for proper tire inflation.

Tires are heavy. Handling tires without proper equipment could cause death or serious injury.

Never weld on a wheel with a tire installed. Always remove the tire completely from the wheel prior to welding.

Always have a qualified tire technician service the tires and wheels. If a tire has lost all pressure, take the tire and wheel to a tire shop or your dealer for service. Explosive separation of the tire can cause serious injury.

DO NOT weld to a wheel or rim until the tire is completely removed. Inflated tires can generate a gas mixture with the air that can be ignited by high temperatures from welding procedures performed on the wheel or rim. Removing the air or loosening the tire on the rim (breaking the bead) will NOT eliminate the hazard. This condition can exist whether tires are inflated or deflated. The tire MUST be completely removed from the wheel or rim prior to welding the wheel or rim.

Driving on public roads and general transportation safety Comply with local laws and regulations.

Use appropriate lighting to meet local regulations.

Make sure that the Slow-Moving Vehicle (SMV) emblem (1) is visible.

86080759

1

Make sure that the brake pedal latch is engaged. You must lock brake pedals together for road travel.

Use safety chains for trailed equipment when safety chains are provided with machine or equipment.

Lift implements and attachments high enough above ground to prevent accidental contact with road.

When you transport equipment or a machine on a transport trailer, make sure that it is properly secured. the SlowMoving Vehicle (SMV) emblem on the equipment or machine is covered while being transported on a trailer.

Be aware of overhead structures or power lines and make sure that the machine and/or attachments can pass safely under.

Travel speed should be such that you maintain complete control and machine stability at all times.

Slow down and signal before turning.

Pull over to allow faster traffic to pass.

Follow correct towing procedure for equipment with or without brakes.

48068916 04/11/2016

7

INTRODUCTION

Power Take-Off (PTO) Power Take-Off (PTO) driven machinery can cause death or serious injury. Before you work on or near the PTO shaft or service or clear the driven machine, put the PTO lever in the disengage position, stop the engine, and remove the key.

Whenever a PTO is in operation, a guard must be in place to prevent death or injury to the operator or bystanders.

When doing stationary PTO work, keep clear of all moving parts and make sure that appropriate guards are in place.

Never use a spline adaptor: • Match the right tractor PTO spline and speed with the PTO drive shaft provided with an implement. This will assure proper geometry and operating speed.

• Never operate 540 RPM implements at 1000 RPM. • Never operate 1000 RPM implements at 540 RPM. • Use of PTO adaptors will void the warranty of the drive shaft, and the PTO drive train of the machine and implement.

• For correct hitch setup and geometry see the operator’s manual.

Reflectors and warning lights You must use flashing amber warning lights (1) when you operate equipment on public roads.

86080759

2

Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Wear Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) such as hard hat, eye protection, heavy gloves, hearing protection, protective clothing, etc.

Do Not Operate tag Before you start servicing the machine, attach a ‘Do Not Operate’ warning tag to the machine in an area that will be visible.

Hazardous chemicals If you are exposed to or come in contact with hazardous chemicals you can be seriously injured. The fluids, lubricants, paints, adhesives, coolant, etc. required for the function of your machine can be hazardous. They may be attractive and harmful to domestic animals as well as humans.

Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) provide information about the chemical substances within a product, safe handling and storage procedures, first aid measures, and procedures to take in the event of a spill or accidental release.

MSDS are available from your dealer.

Before you service your machine check the MSDS for each lubricant, fluid, etc. used in this machine. This information indicates the associated risks and will help you service the machine safely. Follow the information in the MSDS, and on manufacturer containers, as well as the information in this manual, when you service the machine.

48068916 04/11/2016

8

INTRODUCTION

Dispose of all fluids, filters, and containers in an environmentally safe manner according to local laws and regulations.

Check with local environmental and recycling centers or your dealer for correct disposal information.

Store fluids and filters in accordance with local laws and regulations. Use only appropriate containers for the storage of chemicals or petrochemical substances.

Keep out of reach or children or other unauthorized persons.

Applied chemicals require additional precautions. Obtain complete information from the manufacturer or distributor of the chemicals before you use them.

Utility safety Make sure that the machine has sufficient clearance to pass in all directions. Pay special attention to overhead power lines and hanging obstacles. High voltage lines may require significant clearance for safety. Contact local authorities or utilities to obtain safe clearance distances from high voltage power lines.

Retract raised or extended components, if necessary. Remove or lower radio antennas or other accessories. Should a contact between the machine and an electric power source occur, the following precautions must be taken: • Stop the machine movement immediately.

• Apply the parking brake, stop the engine, and remove the key.

• Check if you can safely leave the cab or your actual position without contact with electrical wires. If not, stay in your position and call for help. If you can leave your position without touching lines, jump clear of the machine to make sure that you do not make contact with the ground and the machine at the same time.

• Do not permit anyone to touch the machine until power has been shut off to the power lines.

Electrical storm safety Do not operate machine during an electrical storm.

If you are on the ground during an electrical storm, stay away from machinery and equipment. Seek shelter in a permanent, protected structure.

If an electrical storm should strike during operation, remain in the cab. Do not leave the cab or operator’s platform.

Do not make contact with the ground or objects outside the machine.

48068916 04/11/2016

9

INTRODUCTION

Safety rules - Ecology and the environment Soil, air, and water quality is important for all industries and life in general. When legislation does not yet rule the treatment of some of the substances that advanced technology requires, sound judgment should govern the use and disposal of products of a chemical and petrochemical nature.

Familiarize yourself with the relative legislation applicable to your country, and make sure that you understand this legislation. Where no legislation exists, obtain information from suppliers of oils, filters, batteries, fuels, anti-freeze, cleaning agents, etc., with regard to the effect of these substances on man and nature and how to safely store, use, and dispose of these substances.

Helpful hints • Avoid the use of cans or other inappropriate pressurized fuel delivery systems to fill tanks. Such delivery systems may cause considerable spillage.

• In general, avoid skin contact with all fuels, oils, acids, solvents, etc. Most of these products contain substances that may be harmful to your health.

• Modern oils contain additives. Do not burn contaminated fuels and or waste oils in ordinary heating systems.

• Avoid spillage when you drain fluids such as used engine coolant mixtures, engine oil, hydraulic fluid, brake fluid, etc. Do not mix drained brake fluids or fuels with lubricants. Store all drained fluids safely until you can dispose of the fluids in a proper way that complies with all local legislation and available resources.

• Do not allow coolant mixtures to get into the soil. Collect and dispose of coolant mixtures properly.

• The air-conditioning system contains gases that should not be released into the atmosphere. Consult an air-conditioning specialist or use a special extractor to recharge the system properly.

• Repair any leaks or defects in the engine cooling system or hydraulic system immediately.

• Do not increase the pressure in a pressurized circuit as this may lead to a component failure.

• Protect hoses during welding. Penetrating weld splatter may burn a hole or weaken hoses, allowing the loss of oils, coolant, etc.

Battery recycling Batteries and electric accumulators contain several substances that can have a harmful effect on the environment if the batteries are not properly recycled after use. Improper disposal of batteries can contaminate the soil, groundwater, and waterways. NEW HOLLAND strongly recommends that you return all used batteries to a NEW HOLLAND dealer, who will dispose of the used batteries or recycle the used batteries properly. In some countries, this is a legal requirement.

Mandatory battery recycling NOTE: The following requirements are mandatory in Brazil.

Batteries are made of lead plates and a sulfuric acid solution. Because batteries contain heavy metals such as lead, CONAMA Resolution 401/2008 requires you to return all used batteries to the battery dealer when you replace any batteries. Do not dispose of batteries in your household garbage.

Points of sale are obliged to: • Accept the return of your used batteries • Store the returned batteries in a suitable location • Send the returned batteries to the battery manufacturer for recycling

48068916 04/11/2016

10

INTRODUCTION

Torque - Nominal tightening torques for normal assembly NOTE: In the metric tables, nominal sizes M4 through M8 hardware torque specifications are shown as a Newton meters (pound-inches) numerical value.

Nominal sizes M10 through M24 hardware torque specifications are shown as a Newton meters (pound-feet) numerical value.

Metric hex head (non-flange) hardware Plain (PLN) – an unplated hardware finish with residual manufacturing oils Zinc-dichromate (ZND) – a yellow colored chemical plating formula yellow applied to the hardware

Nominal size

M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M14 M16 M18 M20 M24

Class (CL) 8.8 bolt and Class (CL) 8 nut PLN and ZND N·m (lb in)

Class (CL) 10.9 bolt and Class (CL) 10 nut PLN and ZND N·m (lb in)

Locknut CL 8 w/CL 8.8 bolt ZND N·m (lb in)

Locknut CL 10 w/CL 10.9 bolt ZND N·m (lb in)

3.5 (31) 7.0 (62) 11.8 (104) 28.8 (255)

5.0 (44) 10 (88) 17 (150) 41.3 (366)

1.4 (13) 2.9 (26) 4.9 (43) 11.9 (105)

2.8 (25) 5.5 (49) 9.4 (83) 23 (204)

N·m (lb ft)

N·m (lb ft)

N·m (lb ft)

N·m (lb ft)

57 (42) 100 (74) 159 (117) 248 (183) 352 (260) 500 (369) 865 (638)

82 (60) 143 (105) 227 (168) 354 (261) 487 (359) 690 (509) 1195 (882)

24 (17) 41 (30) 66 (48) 102 (75) 145 (107) 206 (152) 357 (263)

45 (33) 79 (38) 125 (92) 195 (144) 268 (198) 380 (280) 657 (485)

Metric flange head hardware Plain (PLN) – an unplated hardware finish with residual manufacturing oils Zinc-dichromate (ZND) – a yellow colored chemical plating formula yellow applied to the hardware

Nominal size

M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M14 M16 M18 M20 M24

Class (CL) 8.8 bolt and Class (CL) 8 nut PLN and ZND N·m (lb in)

Class (CL) 10.9 Flange locknut Flange locknut bolt and Class CL 10 CL 8 (CL) 10 nut w/CL 10.9 bolt w/CL 8.8 bolt PLN and ZND ZND ZND N·m (lb in) N·m (lb in) N·m (lb in)

3.8 (34) 7.7 (68) 13 (115) 31.7 (281)

5.5 (49) 11 (97) 18.7 (166) 45.5 (403)

4.2 (37) 8.5 (75) 14.3 (127) 35 (310)

6.1 (54) 12 (106) 20.6 (182) 50 (443)

N·m (lb ft)

N·m (lb ft)

N·m (lb ft)

N·m (lb ft)

63 (47) 110 (81) 175 (129) 272 (201) 387 (286) 550 (406) 951 (702)

90 (66) 157 (116) 250 (184) 389 (287) 535 (395) 759 (560) 1315 (970)

69 (51) 121 (89) 193 (142) 299 (221) 426 (315) 605 (447) 1046 (772)

48068916 04/11/2016

11

99 173 275 428 589 835 1447

(73) (128) (202) (316) (435) (616) (1067)

INTRODUCTION

Identification markings Metric hex head, flange hex head and carriage bolts, Classes (CL) 5.6 and upward

NHIL14RB00662AA

1

Metric bolt identification markings 1. Manufacturer's identification 2. Property class

Metric hex nuts and locknuts, Classes (CL) 05 and upward

NHIL14RB00663AA

2

Metric hex nut identification markings • (1) – Manufacturer's identification • (3) – Property class • (2) – Clockwise type markings indicate property class and may include manufacturer identification (if applied), Example: property marks 240 ° apart (shown) at the eight o’clock position indicate a Class 8 property, and marks 300 ° apart at the ten o’clock position indicate a Class 10 property.

48068916 04/11/2016

12

INTRODUCTION

NOTE: In the Imperial units tables, the nominal sizes, 1/4 (0.25) in (inch) and 5/16 (0.3125) in (inch) hardware torque specifications are shown as a Newton meters (pound-inches) numerical value.

Nominal sizes 3/8 (0.375) in (inch) through 1 (1.0) in (inch) hardware torque specifications are shown as a Newton meters (pound-feet) numerical value.

Inch hex head (non-flange) hardware Plain (PLN) – an unplated hardware finish with residual manufacturing oils Zinc-dichromate (ZND) – a yellow colored chemical plating formula yellow applied to the hardware

Nominal size

1/4 (0.25) in 5/16 (0.3125) in 3/8 (0.375) in 7/16 (0.4375) in 1/2 (0.50) in 9/16 (0.5625) in 5/8 (0.625) in 3/4 (0.75) in 7/8 (0.875) in 1 (1.0) in

SAE Grade (GR) 5 bolt and nut PLN and ZND N·m (lb in)

SAE Grade (GR) 8 bolt and nut PLN and ZND N·m (lb in)

Locknut GR B w/ GR 5 bolt ZND N·m (lb in)

Locknut GR C w/ GR 8 bolt ZND N·m (lb in)

13 (115) 27 (239)

18 (159) 38 (336)

7.2 (64) 14.9 (132)

10 (89) 21 (186)

N·m (lb ft)

N·m (lb ft)

N·m (lb ft)

N·m (lb ft)

47 (35) 76 (56) 116 (85) 167 (123) 231 (170) 410 (302) 660 (486) 989 (729)

67 (49) 107 (79) 164 (121) 236 (174) 326 (240) 578 (426) 931 (687) 1396 (1030)

26 (19) 42 (31) 64 (47) 92 (68) 127 (94) 226 (166) 363 (267) 544 (401)

37 (27) 59 (44) 90 (67) 130 (96) 179 (132) 318 (234) 512 (378) 768 (567)

Inch flange head hardware Plain (PLN) – an unplated hardware finish with residual manufacturing oils Zinc-dichromate (ZND) – a yellow colored chemical plating formula yellow applied to the hardware

Nominal size

1/4 (0.25) in 5/16 (0.3125) in 3/8 (0.375) in 7/16 (0.4375) in 1/2 (0.50) in 9/16 (0.5625) in 5/8 (0.625) in 3/4 (0.75) in 7/8 (0.875) in 1 (1.0) in

SAE Grade (GR) 5 bolt and nut PLN and ZND N·m (lb in)

SAE Grade (GR) 8 bolt and nut PLN and ZND N·m (lb in)

Flange locknut GR F w/ GR 5 bolt ZND N·m (lb in)

Flange locknut GR G w/ GR 8 bolt ZND N·m (lb in)

14 (124) 29 (257)

20 (177) 42 (372)

15.4 (136) 32 (283)

22 (195) 46 (407)

N·m (lb ft)

N·m (lb ft)

N·m (lb ft)

N·m (lb ft)

52 (38) 84 (62) 127 (94) 184 (136) 254 (187) 450 (332) 725 (535) 1088 (802)

74 (54) 118 (87) 180 (133) 259 (191) 358 (264) 636 (469) 1024 (755) 1536 (1133)

57 (42) 92 (68) 140 (103) 202 (150) 279 (206) 495 (365) 798 (589) 1197 (882)

81 (9) 130 (96) 198 (146) 285 (210) 394 (290) 700 (516) 1126 (831) 1690 (1246)

48068916 04/11/2016

13

INTRODUCTION

Identification marking Grades of inch bolts and free-spinning nuts SAE (J995) bolt head and nut grade identification

Grade

Grade identification marking

Marking description

Grade 2 No line marks

Grade 5 Three line marks

Grade 8 Six line marks

Grade 2 No circumferential line marks

Grade 5 Two circumferential line marks located 120째 apart

Grade 2 Two circumferential line marks located 60째 apart

Grade 2 No circumferential line marks

Grade 5 Two circumferential line marks located 120째 apart

Grade 8 Two circumferential line marks located 60째 apart

48068916 04/11/2016

14

INTRODUCTION

Grades of inch prevailing torque locknuts, all metal (three common marking methods) On prevailing torque locknuts, the grade of nut is identified by one of three different sets of markings that denote the strength level and manufacturer.

Common prevailing torque locknut grade identification markings

Grade

Grade identification marking

Marking description

Grade A No marks

Grade B (hex nut) and Grade F (flange nut) Three raised or indented dot marks (Marks do not have to be in corners.)

Grade C (hex nut) and Grade F (flange nut) Six raised or indented dot marks (Marks do not have to be in corners.)

Grade A No letter mark on side flat

Grade B Letter B on side flat

Grade C Letter C on side flat

Grade A No notches

Grade B One circumferential notch on all six corners

Grade C Two circumferential notches on all six corners

48068916 04/11/2016

15

INTRODUCTION

Basic instructions - Shop and assembly Shimming For each adjustment operation, select adjusting shims and measure the adjusting shims individually using a micrometer, then add up the recorded values. Do not rely on measuring the entire shimming set, which may be incorrect, or the rated value shown on each shim.

Rotating shaft seals For correct rotating shaft seal installation, proceed as follows: 1. Before assembly, allow the seal to soak in the oil it will be sealing for at least thirty minutes.

2. Thoroughly clean the shaft and check that the working surface on the shaft is not damaged.

3. Position the sealing lip facing the fluid.

NOTE: With hydrodynamic lips, take into consideration the shaft rotation direction and position the grooves so that they will move the fluid towards the inner side of the seal.

4. Coat the sealing lip with a thin layer of lubricant (use oil rather than grease). Fill the gap between the sealing lip and the dust lip on double lip seals with grease.

5. Insert the seal in its seat and press down using a flat punch or seal installation tool. Do not tap the seal with a hammer or mallet.

6. While you insert the seal, check that the seal is perpendicular to the seat. When the seal settles, make sure that the seal makes contact with the thrust element, if required.

7. To prevent damage to the seal lip on the shaft, position a protective guard during installation operations.

O-ring seals Lubricate the O-ring seals before you insert them in the seats. This will prevent the O-ring seals from overturning and twisting, which would jeopardize sealing efficiency.

Sealing compounds Apply a sealing compound on the mating surfaces when specified by the procedure. Before you apply the sealing compound, prepare the surfaces as directed by the product container.

Spare parts Only use CNH Original Parts or NEW HOLLAND Original Parts.

Only genuine spare parts guarantee the same quality, duration, and safety as original parts, as they are the same parts that are assembled during standard production. Only CNH Original Parts or NEW HOLLAND Original Parts can offer this guarantee.

When ordering spare parts, always provide the following information: • Machine model (commercial name) and Product Identification Number (PIN) • Part number of the ordered part, which can be found in the parts catalog

48068916 04/11/2016

16

INTRODUCTION

Protecting the electronic and/or electrical systems during charging and welding To avoid damage to the electronic and/or electrical systems, always observe the following practices: 1. Never make or break any of the charging circuit connections when the engine is running, including the battery connections.

2. Never short any of the charging components to ground.

3. Always disconnect the ground cable from the battery before arc welding on the machine or on any machine attachment.

• Position the welder ground clamp as close to the welding area as possible.

• If you weld in close proximity to a computer module, then you should remove the module from the machine.

• Never allow welding cables to lie on, near, or across any electrical wiring or electronic component while you weld.

4. Always disconnect the negative cable from the battery when charging the battery in the machine with a battery charger.

NOTICE: If you must weld on the unit, you must disconnect the battery ground cable from the machine battery.

The electronic monitoring system and charging system will be damaged if this is not done.

5. Remove the battery ground cable. Reconnect the cable when you complete welding.

WARNING Battery acid causes burns. Batteries contain sulfuric acid.

Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Antidote (external): Flush with water. Antidote (eyes): flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention immediately. Antidote (internal): Drink large quantities of water or milk. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W0111A

Special tools The special tools that NEW HOLLAND suggests and illustrate in this manual have been specifically researched and designed for use with NEW HOLLAND machines. The special tools are essential for reliable repair operations. The special tools are accurately built and rigorously tested to offer efficient and long-lasting operation.

By using these tools, repair personnel will benefit from: • Operating in optimal technical conditions • Obtaining the best results • Saving time and effort • Working in safe conditions

48068916 04/11/2016

17

INTRODUCTION

Specifications Roll conditioner units only Overall width Standard tongue units and swivel tongue units with drawbar hitch Transport position Field position

3429 mm ( 11 ft 3 in) 4877 mm ( 16 ft 0 in)

Swivel tongue units with two-point hitch Transport position Field position

3429 mm ( 11 ft 3 in) 5360 mm ( 17 ft 7 in)

Overall length Standard tongue units Transport position Field position

5131 mm ( 16 ft 10 in) 4750 mm ( 15 ft 7 in)

Swivel tongue units with drawbar hitch Transport position Field position

5715 mm ( 18 ft 9 in) 5334 mm ( 17 ft 6 in)

Swivel tongue units with two-point hitch Transport position Field position

5740 mm ( 18 ft 10 in) 5360 mm ( 17 ft 7 in)

Height Transport position Cutting position Ground clearance (transport)

1600 mm ( 5 ft 3 in) 1346 mm ( 4 ft 5 in) 457 mm (18 in) 2643 mm ( 8 ft 8 in)

Wheel tread width Weight Standard tongue units Swivel tongue units

1864 kg (4100 lb) 1928 kg (4250 lb)

Driveline Tractor power and hydraulic requirement

60 kW (80 Hp) Minimum with two remote circuits with minimum of 10342 kPa (1500 psi) relief pressure.

540 RPM or 1000 RPM Standard tongue.

540 RPM Only for swivel tongue.

Main drive line - slip clutch with overrunning clutch, conditioner roll drive - V-belt with spring loaded idler.

Upper swivel gearbox: 650 ml (22 US fl oz) Lower swivel gearbox: 1800 ml (61 US fl oz)

Input speed Drive protection Swivel hitch gearbox capacities

Header Cutting width Flotation Windrow width Header lift mechanism

3160 mm ( 10 ft 4 in) Vertical and radial.

914 - 2134 mm (36 - 84 in) Hydraulic (master-slave system).

48068916 04/11/2016

18

INTRODUCTION

Roll conditioner units only Cutterbar Type Number of discs Knives per disc Disc cutting diameter Disc drive Disc speed Cutting height, approximate

Modular 8 2 500 mm (19.7 in) Bevel gears in sealed modules.

3000 RPM 32 - 76 mm (1.25 - 3 in)

Conditioner Type Drive

Intermeshing rolls 4HB V-belt and spur gears

Rolls Type Length Diameter Speed

Molded rubber with intermeshing chevron design.

2591 mm (102 in) 264 mm (10.38 in) 635 RPM

Ground speed Field Road

Capacity Tire specification Jack type Tongue swing mechanism

Up to 14 km/h (9 mph).

Up to 32 km/h (20 mph) maximum.

2.5 Ha/hr (6.1 Ac/hr) at 10 km/h (6 mph) and 80 % field efficiency.

9.5L x 14L 6-ply tubeless agricultural implement tire.

Side-wind Hydraulic

48068916 04/11/2016

19

INTRODUCTION

Flail conditioner units only Overall width Standard tongue units and swivel tongue units with drawbar hitch Transport position Field position

3429 mm ( 11 ft 3 in) 4877 mm ( 16 ft 0 in)

Swivel tongue units with two-point hitch Transport position Field position

3429 mm ( 11 ft 3 in) 5360 mm ( 17 ft 7 in)

Overall length Standard tongue units Transport position Field position

5537 mm ( 18 ft 2 in) 5385 mm ( 17 ft 8 in)

Swivel tongue units with drawbar hitch Transport position Field position

6121 mm ( 20 ft 1 in) 5969 mm ( 19 ft 7 in)

Swivel tongue units with two-point hitch Transport position Field position

6146 mm ( 20 ft 2 in) 5994 mm ( 19 ft 8 in)

Height Transport position Cutting position

1600 mm ( 5 ft 3 in) 1346 mm ( 4 ft 5 in) 432 mm (17 in) 2682 mm ( 8 ft 10 in)

Ground clearance (transport) Wheel tread width Weight Standard tongue units Swivel tongue units

1891 kg (4160 lb) 1959 kg (4310 lb)

Drive line Tractor power and hydraulic requirements

60 kW (80 Hp) Minimum with two remote circuits with minimum of or 10342 kPa (1500 psi) relief pressure.

540 RPM or 1000 RPM standard tongue.

540 RPM only on swivel tongue.

Main drive line - slip clutch with overrunning clutch, conditioner roll drive - V-belt with spring loaded idler.

Input speed Drive protection

Header Cutting width Flotation Windrow width Header lift mechanism

3160 mm ( 10 ft 4 in) Vertical and radial 914 - 2134 mm (36 - 84 in) Hydraulic (master-slave system).

48068916 04/11/2016

20

INTRODUCTION

Flail conditioner units only Cutterbar Type Number of discs Knives per disc Disc cutting diameter Disc drive Disc speed Cutting height, approximate

Modular 8 2 500 mm (19.7 in) Bevel gears in sealed modules.

3000 RPM 32 - 83 mm (1.25 - 3 in)

Conditioner Type Drive

Flail 4HB V-belt bevel gears.

Rotor Length Diameter Speed

2591 mm (102 in) 560 mm (22 in) 718 RPM, 1000 RPM (Optional).

Ground speed Field Road

Capacity Tire specification Jack type Tongue shift mechanism

Up to 14 km/h (9 mph).

Up to 32 km/h (20 mph) Maximum.

2.5 Ha/hr (6.1 Ac/hr) @ 10 km/h (6 mph) and 80 % field efficiency.

9.5L x 14L 6-ply tubeless agricultural implement tire.

Side-wind Hydraulic

48068916 04/11/2016

21

INTRODUCTION

Capacities The following table lists the types of consumable products for use when you perform general service on this machine.

Consumable product Material specification Grease lubricant NEW HOLLAND AMBRA GR-9 MULTI-PURPOSE GREASE

CNH Industrial: MAT3550 Performance: NLGI 2, GC-LB

Use All grease fittings Wheel bearings – Repack

Capacity As specified.

Not specified; amount as required

Lubricating oils TUTELA HYPOIDE EP GEAR LUBE SAE 80W-90 OR CNH HYPOIDE SSL SYNTHETIC GEAR LUBE 75W-90 (synthetic)

CNH Industrial: MAT3511 Performance: API GL-5, SAE J2360, MIL-PRF-2105E

Lower swivel gearbox Upper swivel gearbox Step-up gearbox Conditioner drive gearbox Bevel gearbox Cutterbar modules

48068916 04/11/2016

22

1800 mL (61 US fl oz) 650 mL (22 US fl oz) 650 mL (22 US fl oz) 300 mL (10.5 US fl oz) 1850 mL (62.6 US fl oz) 300 mL (10 US fl oz) each

INTRODUCTION

Product identification Product Identification Number (PIN) The PIN plate (1) for the disc mower-conditioner is located on the right-hand side of the trail frame.

93100150

1

1. Model 2. PIN number 3. Weight 4. Model year 5. Year of construction

NHIL14HT00590AA

48068916 04/11/2016

23

2

INTRODUCTION

Product identification - Machine orientation NOTE: To determine the left-hand and the right-hand sides of this equipment, stand behind the unit and look in the direction of travel.

19982145

1

Front side view

93100150

2

Right-hand side

86080827

3

Left-hand side

48068916 04/11/2016

24

SERVICE MANUAL Power Take-Off (PTO) H7230 H7330

48068916 04/11/2016

31

Contents Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31

[31.201] Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.1 [31.214] Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.2 [31.215] Intermediate Power Take-Off (PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3 [31.220] Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.4 [31.225] Clutches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.5

48068916 04/11/2016

31

Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - 201

H7230 H7330

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 1

Contents Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - 201

FUNCTIONAL DATA Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Yoke assembly Overview - Auto slide lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Universal joint Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

SERVICE Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft Remove - 540 RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Disassemble - 540 RPM - Guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Inspect - 540 RPM - Guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Assemble - 540 RPM - Guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Install - 540 RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Remove - 1000 RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Disassemble - 1000 RPM - Guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Assemble - 1000 RPM - Guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Install - 1000 RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Yoke assembly Disassemble - Auto slide lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Assemble - Auto slide lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Universal joint Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Inspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 2

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - Overview The mower-conditioners utilize constant velocity universal joint drivelines for smooth operation, and to provide the ability to swing the tongue during Power Take-Off (PTO) operation. The primary PTO shaft on both 540 RPM and 1000 RPM units is equipped with an 80 ° Constant Velocity (CV) universal joint (1) at the tractor end, and a conventional universal joint (2) at the rear. The secondary PTO shaft on both units use 50 ° CV universal joints (1) Figure 2, at both ends of the shaft.

The CV joint degree rating indicates the maximum allowable operating angle of the CV universal joint; operation at angles exceeding that value will result in universal joint failure.

1411-25

19982150

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 3

1

2

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Yoke assembly - Overview - Auto slide lock The disc mower-conditioner is equipped with an Auto slide lock (1) which automatically latches in the rearward position when pulled back. The primary Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft may then be held with both hands to guide it onto the tractor shaft. As the yoke slides onto the tractor shaft, the slide lock collar springs forward to latch the PTO shaft to the tractor shaft.

1431-3-18N

1

1431-3-19N

2

The Auto slide lock works as follows; as the collar is slid rearward it tends to twist slightly sideways, allowing a shoulder in the collar (1) to catch on a ridge on the yoke (2). As the yoke is slid onto the tractor shaft and the pawls (3) line up with the groove on the tractor shaft, four balls (4) in the yoke are pushed outward by the end of the shaft.

These four balls center the collar, causing the shoulder to disengage from the ridge. The collar springs forward to lock the pawls in the tractor PTO shaft groove.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 4

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Universal joint - Overview The disc mower-conditioner utilizes a Constant Velocity (CV) universal joint driveline for smooth operation. The primary Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft is equipped with an 80 ° CV U-joint (1) at the tractor end and a conventional U-joint (2) at the rear.

50045799

1

A CV joint consists of a double U-joint assembly with both the front (1) and rear (2) yokes connected together with a mechanical connection; this ensures that both the front U-joint and the rear U-joint in the assembly are operating at the same angles. By operating at equal angles, the CV joint provides a constant velocity output at all operating angles and eliminates the vibration that can result when turning sharp in the field.

The CV joint degree rating indicates the maximum allowable operating angle of the CV U-joint; operation at angles exceeding that value will result in CV joint failure. The 80 ° CV joint consists of a front and rear joint which have a spherical ball joint (3) in the strap of the yokes. The center housing of the joint assembly contains a floating intermediate plate (4) with a pin protruding from the center of each side. With the CV joint assembled, the spherical ball joint (3) on the yokes fit over the pin on the intermediate plate (4). As one yoke moves, it shifts the intermediate plate and the opposite yoke as well to maintain the same operating angles of both U-joints. The maximum operating angle occurs when the intermediate plate pin contacts the edge of the center housing opening.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 5

1431-3-22N

2

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - Remove - 540 RPM NOTE: The rear half of the primary Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft and the secondary drive shaft must be removed from the machine in order to repair the universal joints or guards.

Standard tongue 1. Remove the front PTO shield by removing two 5/16 in x 3/4 in bolts and lock washers at (1).

3657-7

1

3657-6

2

93098062

3

2. Remove the 1/2 in x 3 in bolt (1) and locknut, and then slide the PTO shaft off of the gearbox shaft.

Swivel tongue 3. Remove the plastic PTO shield (1) and slide it back to gain access to the PTO slide collar.

4. Pull back on the collar to unlock the pins and remove the PTO shaft off the swivel gearbox PTO shaft.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 6

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - Disassemble - 540 RPM - Guards Standard driveline 1. Insert a screw driver into the slot (1) in the driveline guard, and then push down and forward to snap the retaining ring out of its groove. Reach in the end of the bell to finish popping the retaining ring out of its groove.

2. Slide the driveline guard off of the drive shaft. It may be necessary to tap the guard lightly with a rubber mallet to unseat the guard bushings from the shaft.

A3657-06

1

1411_3_10

2

Constant Velocity (CV) driveline 3. Insert screw driver into slot (1) in the driveline guard, and push down and forward to snap the retaining ring out of groove. It may be easier to try different slots until the end of the retaining ring is found. Push down and forward to snap the retaining ring out of its groove, and then continue the process at each slot to fully remove the retaining ring.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 7

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

4. Remove the overlap section grease fitting (1) on the female secondary of the Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft prior to removing the driveline guard.

NOTICE: The internal bushings in the driveline guard will be pulled out of the tube if the grease fitting is not removed.

1411_3_21

3

1411_3_11

4

5. Slide the driveline guard off of the drive shaft. It may be necessary to tap the guard lightly with a rubber mallet to unseat the guard bushings from the shaft, or from the center housing (1) on the 80 ° Constant Velocity (CV) universal joint shielding.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 8

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - Inspect - 540 RPM - Guards The driveline guards (1) should be inspected for any signs of physical damage such as dents or bends. If any damage is found, the guards should be replaced.

Inspect the driveline guards bushings (2); replace the bushings if they are worn enough to allow guard movement when mounted on the shaft.

1411_3_11

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 9

1

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - Assemble - 540 RPM - Guards Standard driveline guards 1. Install the nylon bushing (1) in yoke groove and position the retaining ring in between yoke and nylon bushing.

1411_3_12

1

A3657-06

2

2. Slide the guard onto the shaft; make sure t that he bushing on the end of the guard slips over the end of the shaft. Turn the guard to seat the nylon bushing properly in the guard.

3. Rotate the guard so that the opening of the retaining ring is positioned close to the slot (1) in the guard. Insert a screwdriver into the slot and use it to hold the end of the retaining ring securely against the guard.

4. Reach in through the front of the guard with a second screwdriver, and pry the opposite end of the retaining ring into the groove in the guard. Continue to hold the ring with the first screwdriver, and use the second screwdriver to work around the guard until the retaining ring is fully seated in the groove in the guard.

5. Check that the retaining ring and nylon bushing have seated properly in the guard, and that the guard rotates freely.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 10

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

80° Constant Velocity (CV) front guard 6. Install the nylon bushing (1) in the yoke groove; the retaining ring (2) should be positioned between the Constant Velocity (CV) joint and the nylon bushing.

7. Slip the guard over the shaft and onto the nylon bushing; it will be necessary to align the front portion of the guard with the CV joint center housing. Firmly push the guard on to seat the nylon sleeve in the guard over the center housing of the CV joint.

8. Rotate the guard to ensure the nylon bushing is seated properly, and rotates with the guard.

1411_3_11

3

1411_3_10

4

9. Position the opening of retaining ring between two slots in the guard. Insert a screwdriver into a slot (1) in the guard near the end of the retaining ring, and use it to hold the retaining ring securely. Insert a second screwdriver into the adjacent slot (2) away from the open end of the retaining ring, and push down and rearward to seat the retaining ring into the groove in the guard.

10. Keep the second screwdriver in place to hold the ring and move the first screwdriver to the remaining slots to finish prying the retaining ring into groove.

11. Check that the retaining ring and nylon bushing have seated properly in the guard, and that the guard rotates freely.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 11

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - Install - 540 RPM Standard tongue 1. Apply a thin coat of NEW HOLLAND AMBRA GR-9 MULTI-PURPOSE GREASE to the splines and slide the Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft back onto the bottom shaft of the step-up gearbox.

2. Install the 1/2 in x 3 in bolt (1) and locknut (2).

3. Torque the locknut to 163 N·m (120 lb ft).

NOTICE: Do not over-torque; locknuts are Class C, and are limited to 163 N·m (120 lb ft).

4. Check to ensure the oil level of the step-up gearbox at (3) is sufficient. If necessary, add TUTELA HYPOIDE EP GEAR LUBE SAE 80W-90 or CNH HYPOIDE SSL SYNTHETIC GEAR LUBE 75W-90 (synthetic).

3657-6

1

3657-7

2

93098062

3

5. Secure the front PTO shield with two 5/16 in x 3/4 in bolts and lock washers (1).

Swivel tongue 6. Attach the PTO shaft; pull back on the locking collar and slide the PTO shaft onto the swivel gearbox shaft until the pins engage in the gearbox PTO shaft groove when the collar is released.

7. Install the primary PTO shaft guard (1).

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 12

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - Remove - 1000 RPM 1. Remove the front Power Take-Off (PTO) shield by removing two 5/16 in x 3/4 in bolts and lock washers (1).

3657-7

1

56065239

2

2. Remove the tapered pin (1), the washer, and the locknut (2).

3. Slide the PTO shaft off of the gearbox shaft.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 13

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - Disassemble - 1000 RPM Guards 1. Remove the shield cone screws (1) on the rear yoke.

2. Slide the drive shaft out of the shield (2).

86065244

1

86065245

2

86065240

3

3. Spread apart the support ring (1) and remove from the groove.

4. At the front yoke, remove the shield cone screws (1).

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 14

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

5. Remove the cone (1) by sliding it off of the shaft (2).

86065241

4

86065242

5

6. Spread apart the support rings (1) and remove them from the grooves.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 15

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - Assemble - 1000 RPM - Guards 1. At the rear yoke, grease the groove (1). Place the support ring (2) around the groove so that the grease fitting (3) faces the front yoke.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 16

86065247

1

86065245

2

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

2. At the front yoke, grease the grooves (1). Place the support rings (2) around the grooves. Place the smaller support ring so that the grease fitting faces the rear yoke.

86065243

3

86065242

4

86065250

5

3. Slide the cone shield back on to the shaft covering the Constant Velocity (CV) joint. Position the cone shield so that the grease fitting (1) on the support ring is protruding from its relative hole in the cone shield.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 17

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

4. Align the radial holes (1) in the shield with the grease fittings (2) on the CV joint. Lubricate the Power TakeOff (PTO) shaft with grease.

86065248

6

86065254

7

86065240

8

86065259

9

5. Slide the guard over the PTO shaft, with the tractor image toward the slide lock.

6. Align the grease fitting (1) with the square notch cut into the guard. Secure the cone guard and guard to the support rings with the screws.

7. Stand the unit up on end, on the floor, or workbench.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 18

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

8. Slide the female Shaft over the male shaft.

86065260

10

86065244

11

9. Align the grease fitting (1) with the square notch cut out of the guard. Secure the guard to the support ring with screws.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 19

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - Install - 1000 RPM 1. Apply a thin coat of NEW HOLLAND AMBRA GR-9 MULTI-PURPOSE GREASE to the splines and slide the Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft onto the bottom shaft of the step-up gearbox.

2. Place the tapered pin (1) into the non-machined end of the yoke hole.

3. Position the pin in the yoke with the tapered portion of the pin toward the groove in the shaft. Tap the pin end until the head is within 6.4 mm (1/4 in) of the yoke and the threaded end is protruding out of the yoke.

4. Place a washer (2) and a nut (3) on the pin.

5. Torque the nut to 142 N¡m (105 lb ft). Tap the head of the pin with a hammer and torque the nut again.

56065238

1

3657-7

2

6. Install the front PTO shield and secure with two 5/16 in x 3/4 in bolts and lock washers at (1).

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 20

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Yoke assembly - Disassemble - Auto slide lock 1. Pull the Auto slide lock collar rearward until it latches in place. Use a screwdriver or spring pick to remove the retaining ring (1) from the end of the yoke.

1431-3-18N

1

1431-3-19N

2

1431-3-20N

3

2. Slide the collar (1) off the yoke and remove the spring (2) from the yoke barrel.

NOTE: The spring is an interference fit and will have to be worked off the yoke barrel.

3. Remove the pawls (3) by reaching into the yoke bore and pushing the pawls outwards so that they can be removed. Remove the four centering balls (4) from the yoke using the same process.

4. Thoroughly clean all slide lock components. Clean the yoke bore and pawl holes. Replace the yoke if damage or excessive wear is found.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 21

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Yoke assembly - Assemble - Auto slide lock 1. Coat the outer surface of the yoke barrel (1) with grease; push grease into the centering ball bores and the pawl holes in the yoke. Apply grease to the four centering balls (2) and insert them into their bores; the grease will hold them in place.

2. Apply grease to the sides of the pawls (3) and insert them into the square holes positioning them so that the lip of the pawl faces into the groove in the yoke barrel.

The pawls must slide freely up and down and must be flush with the top of the yoke barrel.

3. Push a new spring over the yoke barrel up to the shoulder.

NOTE: One end of the spring has a smaller diameter than the other. Be sure the small diameter of spring is up against the shoulder on the yoke barrel.

1431-3-19N

1

1431-3-18N

2

4. Fill the inside of the collar cavity with grease. Slide the collar (1) over the yoke barrel ensuring the large diameter end of the spring stays inside the collar against the front lip. Pull the collar rearward past the retaining ring groove until it latches in place. Install the retaining ring (2) in the groove.

5. Grab the collar and manually center it on the yoke so that it springs forward; the collar must slide freely and the pawls must move up and down after assembly.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 22

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Universal joint - Disassemble 1. Remove the Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft from the unit and remove the shielding.

2. To disassemble a universal joint, the first step is to remove the snap rings. Use pliers or a spring pick to remove internal snap rings (1). External snap rings (2) may be removed by using two flat blade screwdrivers; use a screwdriver to hold one end of the snap ring while prying the other end out of the groove with the other screwdriver.

NOTE: Outer yokes use internal snap rings, and CV yokes use external snap rings. On standard U-joints for the primary PTO shaft, the snap rings are external.

14113-5N

1

50051143

2

14113-7N

3

Figure 1 shows 80 ° Constant Velocity (CV) U-joints on the primary PTO shaft.

3. Remove the grease zerk (3) from the bearing cup on the U-joint to be disassembled.

4. The U-joint bearing cups are retained with externaltype snap rings (1) positioned on the inner side of the yoke ears. Remove the snap rings by positioning a screwdriver against the open end of the snap ring and give a light blow to the screwdriver to pop the snap ring off the bearing cup.

5. Position the joint in an open vise with each ear of one yoke supported by a vise jaw. With a soft hammer or mallet, strike the top ear of the unsupported yoke at (1).

NOTICE: Do not use a hard-faced hammer because it may damage the edge of the bearing cup bore in the yoke and cause the bearing cup to hang up or seize in the yoke.

6. Pull the bearing out of the yoke ear. If necessary grip the loosened bearing in a vise and drive the yoke off the bearing by striking the yoke ear with the soft-faced hammer or mallet.

7. This same procedure should be followed to remove the bearing directly opposite the one just removed after which the yoke itself may be removed.

8. Remove the remaining two bearing cups from the yoke using the same process described in steps 4 and 5.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 23

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Universal joint - Inspect NOTE: The U-joint cross and bearings must be replaced anytime the U-joint is disassembled even if the cross and bearings were not the source of failure.

1. Inspect the yoke ears (1) for wear in the bearing area; replace the yoke if there is any evidence of wear or if the bearing area is distorted. The bearing cups must be a tight fit in the yoke ear.

14113-8N

1

14113-18N

2

2. On the Constant Velocity (CV) U-joints, it is necessary to inspect the intermediate connection between the yokes. On the 80 ° CV U-joint, inspect the conical bushings (2), Figure 1, on the yokes for wear or excessive play. Inspect the intermediate plate (3), Figure 1, for wear or damage on the attaching pins and excessive wear between the plate and housing. Replace any components as necessary.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 24

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft

Universal joint - Assemble 1. To assemble the U-joint, start one bearing cup into the yoke ear, and position the center cross through the yoke.

NOTE: When assembling a Constant Velocity (CV) U-joint, install the cross into the outer yoke first, and then assemble the yoke and cross assembly into the intermediate housing.

NOTE: It may be difficult to rotate the cross after seating the second bearing. This condition will be corrected after the complete assembly of the U-joint.

2. Insert the bearings in the outside of the yoke ears, and position the assembly in a vise. Press the bearings in until they are flush with the edge of the yoke.

14113-19N

1

14113-20N

2

3. Using a socket of the same diameter as the bearing, press the bearing into the yoke ear until the snap ring groove is exposed on the inside of the yoke ear. Install the snap ring over the bearing cup.

4. Reposition the yoke and cross in the vise, and use the socket to press the opposite bearing fully into the yoke ear while rotating the cross to ensure it does not bind up. Continue to press the bearing into the yoke ear until the snap ring can be installed. It may be necessary to push the bearing in as far as possible with the vise, and then remove the yoke assembly and strike the yoke ears with a sharp blow from a hammer to spring the yoke enough to install the snap ring.

On the 80 ° CV joint, slide the conical bushing in the end yoke over the pin on the intermediate plate to establish the proper connection.

Install the remaining bearing cups using the same process described in step 1.

5. After complete assembly of the U-joint, strike the forged surfaces of all yoke ears with a sharp blow from a hammer. This will ensure proper seating of the bearing cups, and eliminate any tightness to ensure a free flexing joint.

NOTICE: Use caution not to strike the bearing bore area of the yoke, as this will damage the bore and may cause premature cross bearing failure.

6. Install the shielding on the Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 25

Index Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - 201 Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - Assemble - 1000 RPM - Guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16

Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - Assemble - 540 RPM - Guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - Disassemble - 1000 RPM - Guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14

Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - Disassemble - 540 RPM - Guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - Inspect - 540 RPM - Guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - Install - 1000 RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20

Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - Install - 540 RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12

Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - Remove - 1000 RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13

Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft - Remove - 540 RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

Universal joint - Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25

Universal joint - Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23

Universal joint - Inspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24

Universal joint - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

Yoke assembly - Assemble - Auto slide lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22

Yoke assembly - Disassemble - Auto slide lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21

Yoke assembly - Overview - Auto slide lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

48068916 04/11/2016

31.1 [31.201] / 26

Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) - 214

H7230 H7330

48068916 04/11/2016

31.2 [31.214] / 1

Contents Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) - 214

SERVICE Drive shaft Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

48068916 04/11/2016

31.2 [31.214] / 2

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO)

Drive shaft - Remove 1. Remove the shield (1) from the rear side of the step-up gearbox by squeezing the sides together off the retaining pins.

2. Slide shield over the secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft. Remove the tapered pin, the washer, and the locknut.

3. Slide the PTO shaft off of the gearbox shaft.

NOTICE: The secondary PTO shaft is very heavy and awkward; use caution not to drop the shaft assembly as damage to the Constant Velocity (CV) universal joint will result.

36080758

1

86065236

2

4. Open the end shield on the header by unhooking the rubber straps, lifting the shield up, and swinging it rearward.

5. Remove the tapered pin (1), the washer, and the locknut (2) from the secondary PTO yoke (3).

6. Slide the yoke off of the gearbox input shaft (4).

48068916 04/11/2016

31.2 [31.214] / 3

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO)

Drive shaft - Disassemble 1. At either end, remove the screws (1) that secure the shield, the cone shield, and the support ring together.

86065255

1

86065256

2

2. Slide the two shafts apart.

3. Slide the cone shield (1) off of the support ring.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.2 [31.214] / 4

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO)

4. Spread apart the support ring (1) and remove it from the groove.

86065257

3

86065258

4

86065262

5

86065263

6

5. On the opposite end of the Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft, remove the screws (1).

6. Slide the shield (1) off of the PTO shaft.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.2 [31.214] / 5

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO)

7. Spread apart the support ring (1) and remove it from the groove.

86065264

7

86065265

8

8. Remove the grease from support ring grooves.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.2 [31.214] / 6

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO)

Drive shaft - Assemble 1. At the clutch end of the Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft, lubricate the support ring groove (1) with NEW HOLLAND AMBRA GR-9 MULTI-PURPOSE GREASE. 2. Lubricate the male PTO shaft (2) with NEW HOLLAND AMBRA GR-9 MULTI-PURPOSE GREASE.

86065258

1

86065257

2

86065256

3

3. Place the support ring (1) back on to the groove.

4. Slide the cone shield back on to the shaft to cover the Constant Velocity (CV) universal joint. Position the cone shield so that the grease fitting (1) on the support ring is protruding from its relative hole in the cone shield.

5. For the opposite end, repeat Steps 1 through 4.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.2 [31.214] / 7

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO)

6. Slide the two guards together.

7. Place the guards onto the female PTO shaft.

NOTE: The end with the tractor image (1) goes opposite the end with the clutch.

86065254

4

86065262

5

86065255

6

8. Align the grease fitting (1) with the square notch cut into the guard. Secure the cone guard and guard to the support ring with the screws.

9. Slide the two shafts together.

10. Align the grease fitting with the square notch cut into the guard. Secure the cone guard and guard to the support ring with screws.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.2 [31.214] / 8

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO)

Drive shaft - Install 1. Apply a thin coat of NEW HOLLAND AMBRA GR-9 MULTI-PURPOSE GREASE to the splines and slide the yoke onto the splines.

2. Place the tapered pin (1) into the non machined end of the yoke hole.

3. Position the pin in the yoke with the tapered portion of the pin toward the groove in the shaft.

4. Tap the pin end until the head is within 6.4 mm (1/4 in) of the yoke and the threaded end is protruding out of the yoke.

5. Place a washer (2) and a nut (3) on the pin.

6. Torque the nut to 142 N¡m (105 lb ft). Tap the head of the pin with a hammer and re-torque the nut.

7. Secure the Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft shielding.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.2 [31.214] / 9

56065238

1

Index Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) - 214 Drive shaft - Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

Drive shaft - Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

Drive shaft - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

Drive shaft - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

48068916 04/11/2016

31.2 [31.214] / 10

Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Intermediate Power Take-Off (PTO) - 215

H7230 H7330

48068916 04/11/2016

31.3 [31.215] / 1

Contents Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Intermediate Power Take-Off (PTO) - 215

SERVICE Drive shaft Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

48068916 04/11/2016

31.3 [31.215] / 2

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Intermediate Power Take-Off (PTO)

Drive shaft - Remove 1. Remove the secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft plastic cover (1).

93098057

1

93098056

2

93098055

3

2. Remove the metal cover (1) by removing the three 3/8 inch x 1 inch carriage bolts, three M10 lock washers, and three 3/8 inch flange nuts (2).

3. Remove the front side of the secondary PTO shaft by removing the locknut, the washer, and the pin at (1).

4. Slide the PTO off the shaft and support it with a suitable stand.

5. Retrieve the shims (2) from the shaft and save for installation.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.3 [31.215] / 3

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Intermediate Power Take-Off (PTO)

NOTICE: If unit is equipped with the drawbar hitch option, removal of the jack support is required as shown in Step 6. Support the tongue with a suitable lifting device or stand.

6. Remove the jack stand (1) from the jack support.

7. Remove the jack support (2) by removing the four 5/8 inch x 1-3/4 inch bolts, four 5/8 inch flat washers, four 5/8 inch lock washers, and four 5/8 inch nuts (3).

930900475

4

76103758

5

8. Slide the shield (1) that covers the front side of the PTO shaft.

9. Remove the bolt (2) and the nut (3) that secures the PTO shaft to the gearbox.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.3 [31.215] / 4

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Intermediate Power Take-Off (PTO)

76103757

6

10. Remove the six 1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch carriage bolts (1), six 1/2 inch lock washers (2), and six 1/2 inch flange nuts (3).

11. Remove the intermediate shaft (4) from the tongue.

Retrieve the two bearing flanges (5), the bearing (6), the washers (7), and the washers (8).

NOTE: Loosen the set screw in the bearing to allow the bearing to be removed from the shaft.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.3 [31.215] / 5

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Intermediate Power Take-Off (PTO)

Drive shaft - Install 1. Slide the plastic shield (1) onto the front side of the shaft (2).

76103758

76103757

2

2. Install the rear metal shield (1) on the shaft as shown.

3. Install washers (2) and washers (3) from removal onto the shaft prior to installing.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.3 [31.215] / 6

1

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Intermediate Power Take-Off (PTO)

4. Install the rear half of the intermediate Power TakeOff (PTO) shaft through the tongue support. Slide the front half of the PTO shaft onto the swivel gearbox and secure with the 1/2 inch bolt (1) and 1/2 inch locknut (2) from removal.

5. Torque the hardware to 164 N·m (121 lb ft). Install the PTO plastic cover (3).

76103758

76103757

4

6. Install the two bearing flanges (1) and bearing (2) as shown onto the PTO shaft.

7. Secure the front cover (3) and bearing flanges (1) with bearing (2) to the swivel tongue with six 1/2 inch carriage bolts (4), six 1/2 inch Belleville lock washers (5) and six 1/2 inch flange nuts (6) from removal.

8. Torque the 1/2 inch flange nuts to 113 N·m (83 lb ft).

9. Torque the set screw (7) to 18 N·m (155 lb in).

48068916 04/11/2016

31.3 [31.215] / 7

3

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Intermediate Power Take-Off (PTO)

76103757

5

10. Install the washers (1), (2) and (3) onto the PTO shaft.

11. Install the hub (4) onto the PTO shaft.

12. Apply grease to the splines on the input shaft. Slide the yoke onto the input shaft until the pin hole aligns with the groove inch the shaft.

13. Determine how many shims (1) are required to fill the gap between the spacer and the bearing. Remove the shaft again, install the shims and install the yoke onto the shaft.

14. Place the tapered pin into the non-machined end of the yoke hole. Position the pin inch the yoke with the tapered portion of the pin toward the groove inch the shaft. Tap the pin head until the head is within 6 mm (1/4 in) of the yoke.

93098055

6

93098056

7

15. Secure the pin with the washer and locknut (2).

16. Torque the locknut to 142 N¡m (105 lb ft). Tap the head of the pin again and re-torque the nut to 142 N¡m (105 lb ft).

NOTE: It is recommended to repeat this torque procedure after the initial 50 hours of use.

17. Slide the metal cover (1) over the PTO shaft and secure with three 3/8 inch x 1 inch carriage bolts, three M10 lock washers, and three 3/8 inch flange nuts (2) from removal.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.3 [31.215] / 8

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Intermediate Power Take-Off (PTO)

18. Install the plastic PTO cover (1) over the pins on the metal PTO cover, as shown.

93098057

8

930900475

9

NOTICE: If the unit is equipped with the drawbar hitch option, installation of the jack support is required.

19. Install the jack support (1) and secure with four 5/8 inch x 1-3/4 inch bolts, four 5/8 inch flat washers, four 5/8 inch lock washers, and four 5/8 inch nuts (2) from removal.

20. Install the jack stand (3) on the jack support.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.3 [31.215] / 9

Index Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Intermediate Power Take-Off (PTO) - 215 Drive shaft - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

Drive shaft - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

48068916 04/11/2016

31.3 [31.215] / 10

Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Gearbox - 220

H7230 H7330

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 1

Contents Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Gearbox - 220

FUNCTIONAL DATA Gearbox Overview - step-up gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Exploded view of swivel gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

SERVICE Gearbox Service instruction - to convert step-up gearbox for different PTO speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Remove - Step-up gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Disassemble - Step-up gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Assemble - Step-up gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Install - Step-up gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Remove - Swivel gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Disassemble - Swivel gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Assemble - Swivel gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Install - Swivel gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 2

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Overview - step-up gearbox The units are shipped from the factory with the Power Take-Off (PTO) drive line configured for 540 PTO operation. In this mode, the 540 RPM primary PTO shaft (1) connects to the 21 spline gearbox shaft (2) and power flows through the gearbox to step up the output to the secondary PTO shaft to 1000 RPM. The output shaft of the gearbox also extends out the front of the gearbox. For 1000 RPM PTO operation, the 1000 RPM PTO primary shaft connects to the 6 spline end of the output shaft (3) to provide a direct drive to the secondary drive-line.

NOTICE: The gearbox must be removed and inverted for 1000 RPM operation to properly align the PTO shaft with the tractor, and to prevent the PTO shaft from pulling apart over rolling terrain.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 3

3657-08

1

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Exploded view of swivel gearbox

93100154

1

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 4

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

REF. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17)

DESCRIPTION Shim, Protective Washer Spacer Shim Bearing, Roller Housing Snap Ring, Internal, Retaining Ring Gear, Pinion, 17 Teeth Housing, Extension Neck Snap Ring Seal, Double Lip Shaft, 40 mm x 80 mm x 12 mm Shaft, 1-3/8 in, 21 Teeth Nut, M30 x 1.5 Shim Kit Bearing, Tapered Roller Housing, Extension, Outer Neck Protective Washer Oil Seal, 95 mm x 120 mm x 12 mm

Qty.

REF.

1 1 4 2 2 2 1 1 4

(18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26)

Plug, 1/4 in Pinion, 17 Teeth Plug, 3/8 in Gas Cap Hair Pin Cotter Shaft Gear, Crown Wheel, 23 Teeth Locknut, M95 x 2 Tapered Roller Bearing

2 1 3 2 2 1 1 1 2

2

(27)

Bolt- M10 x 25 mm G12.9

16

2 2 2 4 1 2 1

(28) (29) (30) (31) (32) (33)

O-ring, 62 mm Gear, Crown Wheel, 23 Teeth Plug- 3/8 in Gas Oil Seal, 40 mm x 72 mm x 10 mm Elbow, 90° 3/8 in Gas Breather, 3/8 in Gas

1 1 1 2 2 2

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 5

DESCRIPTION

Qty.

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Service instruction - to convert step-up gearbox for different PTO speed WARNING Heavy object!

ALWAYS use adequate lifting equipment (heavy-duty hoist, loader, or forklift) to lift the component.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W0101A

1. Remove the step-up gearbox from the machine. See Gearbox - Remove - Step-up gearbox (31.220).

3657-7

1

3657-14

2

For 540 RPM operation: 2. Remove the breather (1) Figure 3, from the plug on the top of the gearbox. Lay box on its side, and remove the 1/8 in pipe plug (2) from below the output shaft bearing bore. Reinstall the breather into the bearing bore hole, and the 1/8 in pipe plug into the drain plug.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 6

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

For 1000 RPM operation: 3. Remove the breather (1), Figure 2, from above the output shaft. Lay box on its side, and remove the 1/8 in pipe plug (1) from the center of the drain plug.

4. Reinstall the breather into the drain plug, and the 1/8 in pipe plug into the breather hole.

5. Install the step-up gearbox onto the machine. See Gearbox - Install - Step-up gearbox (31.220).

3657-16

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 7

3

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Remove - Step-up gearbox 1. Remove the front Power Take-Off (PTO) shield by removing two bolts and lock washers at (1). Remove the existing primary shaft from the gearbox by removing the bolt and locknut at (2).

3657-7

1

1411_3_16

2

3657-12

3

2. Squeeze the sides of the rear PTO shield together until they slide off retaining pins; pull the shield firmly downwards off upper retaining pin to remove it.

3. Remove the two bolts (1) and locknuts that clamp the secondary PTO shaft to the gearbox output shaft, and slide the PTO shaft off.

NOTICE: The secondary PTO shaft is very heavy and awkward; use caution not to drop the shaft assembly as personal injury or damage to the CV joint may result.

4. Remove the rear PTO shield mount by removing two bolts, flat washers, lock washers, and nuts at (2).

5. Remove the four bolts and flat washers at (1), which attach the gearbox to the tongue. Tip gearbox forward, and remove it from the tongue.

NOTICE: The step-up gearbox is heavy and awkward; use caution not to drop the gearbox as personal injury or damage to the gearbox may result.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 8

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Disassemble - Step-up gearbox 1. Drain the oil from the gearbox.

2. Remove the cover plate (1) from the gearbox by removing eight bolts and lock washers. Pry the cover off of the gearbox, and clean off any sealant residue.

1411_4_1

1

1411_4_2

2

1411_4_3

3

3. Remove all three bearing caps (1) by removing the bolts and lock washers, and pry the bearing caps off.

Be careful not to damage the shims under the bearing caps. Pry the shaft seal (2) out of the output shaft bearing cap.

4. Drill a 10 mm (3/8 in) hole (1) in the center of the expansion plug, taking care not to damage the shaft behind the plug. Pry the plug out of its retaining groove in the gearbox with a punch or screwdriver.

NOTE: The intermediate shaft has a 10 mm (3/8 in) threaded hole in it; use caution not to damage the threads while drilling the hole in the plug, or when prying plug out of the bore.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 9

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

5. Position the gearbox in a press with the back side of the gearbox facing down, and push the shafts out of the gearbox, starting with the output shaft. The shafts must be pushed out of the upper bearings only, as the shafts are a slip fit in the gears. As the shafts are pushed out of the upper bearing, the lower bearing cup and shaft will drop out of the gearbox suddenly; use caution to prevent damage to these components. Remove the gears out of the open end of the gearbox as each shaft is removed.

1411_4_4

4

1411_4_6

5

6. Pry the input and output shaft seals (1) out of the gearbox housing. Drive the three remaining bearing cups out of the gearbox housing. Use a split bearing clamp to capture the bearing cones on the shafts, and press the shafts out of the bearings.

7. Clean and de-grease all sealing surfaces on the gearbox housing, the cover plate, and the bearing caps.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 10

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Assemble - Step-up gearbox 1. Clean and inspect all parts. Inspect the shafts for excessive wear or damage to splined surfaces, and for damage on the bearing shoulders. Check the gear teeth for chipping or cracks, and the mating splines for wear. Replace any damaged parts.

2. Replace bearings if any pitting or brinelling of the bearing cup or cone is noticed. Replace both bearing cup and cone if damage is found; do not intermix old and new bearing components.

3. Always install new shaft seals when rebuilding the step-up gearbox.

1411_4_7

1

1411_4_6

2

1411_4_7A

3

4. Drive the two shaft seals (1) in flush with the front of the gearbox housing, and apply grease to the seal lips.

5. Install three new bearing cups into the front side of the gearbox housing, seating them securely against the shoulders in the housing. Apply oil to the new bearing cones, and press them onto the rear end of each shaft as indicated: • Input shaft, (1) • Short, non-splined end • Intermediate shaft, (2) • End opposite threaded hole • Output shaft, (3) • Long end with 21 spline shank

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 11

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

6. Position the gearbox housing in a press with the front of the gearbox facing down. Apply oil to the bearing cone, and install it into the bearing cup in the housing. Place the 39T drive gear into the housing over the bearing and insert the input shaft through the gear and bearing cone. Press the input shaft as required to fully seat bearing cone against the shoulder on the shaft.

7. Apply oil to the new intermediate shaft bearing cone, and install it into the bearing cup in the housing; place a 21T gear over bearing. Insert the intermediate shaft down through the gear until end of shaft is started into bearing cone. Press the shaft to seat bearing cone against the shoulder on shaft.

8. Apply oil to the new output shaft bearing cone, and install it into the bearing cup in the housing; lace the remaining 21T gear over the bearing. Insert the 6-spline end of the output shaft down through the gear and bearing cone. Press the output shaft as required to seat the bearing cone against the shoulder on shaft.

1411_4_8

4

1411_4_9

5

1411_4_10

6

9. Install the three bearing cups (1) into the rear of the gearbox.

10. Install the input shaft bearing cap and original shim pack using three bolts and lock washers. If the original shim pack is destroyed, or if all new parts are being used, use a starting shim pack thickness of 1.02 1.27 mm (0.040 - 0.050 in). Install a dial indicator and measure input shaft end play. Install shims as required to adjust the end play of the shaft between 0.025 - 0.076 mm (0.001 - 0.003 in).

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 12

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

11. Install the intermediate shaft bearing cap and original shim pack using three bolts and lock washers. If the original shim pack is destroyed, or if all new parts are being used, use a starting shim pack thickness of 1.02 - 1.27 mm (0.040 - 0.050 in). The dial indicator may be positioned to read off the rear of the shaft, by removing the plug in the bearing cap, and installing the indicator probe through the hole, or positioned on the front of the shaft as shown.

12. Thread a 3/8 in T-handle or bolt into the front end of the intermediate shaft, and use it to move the shaft to check for end play. Install shims as required to adjust the end play of the intermediate shaft to between 0.025 - 0.076 mm (0.001 - 0.003 in).

1411_4_11

7

1411_4_12

8

1411_4_2

9

13. Drive a shaft seal into the output shaft bearing cap until it is flush with the face of the cap, and apply grease to the seal lip. Install the bearing cap and the original shim pack using three bolts and lock washers. If the original shim pack is destroyed, or if all new parts are being used, use a starting shim pack thickness of 1.02 - 1.27 mm (0.040 - 0.050 in). Install a dial indicator and measure the shaft end play. Install shims as required to adjust end play of the shaft between 0.025 - 0.076 mm (0.001 - 0.003 in).

14. After the end play is adjusted on all three shafts, remove the bearing caps (1) apply a thin coat of LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the pilot surface of the bearing caps and reinstall the caps. Apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the ends of the bolts before you install them.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 13

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

15. Apply a thin coat of LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the edge of the expansion plug (1) and insert it into the bore of the intermediate shaft until it contacts the shoulder. The plug must then be hammered in place to seat the edges of the plug into a recess in the bore.

Hammer over the full surface of the plug, starting in the center and working outwardly in a circular pattern until the outer face of the plug is flush with, or slightly recessed past the face of the bore.

NOTE: Do not drive plug in too far, as it may contact the end of the shaft.

1411_4_13

10

1411_4_1

11

16. Apply a bead of LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant on the housing and install the cover plate (1).

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 14

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Install - Step-up gearbox 1. Tip the step-up gearbox so that the breather is positioned upwards and lift it back into the tongue; for 1000 RPM operation, it will be necessary to install the top of gearbox first, and then swing bottom of the gearbox into the frame to avoid damage to the breather.

NOTICE: The step-up gearbox is heavy and awkward; use caution not to drop the gearbox as personal injury or damage to the gearbox may result.

2. Install the four retaining bolts (1), and torque to 224 N·m (165 lb ft).

3. Install the rear Power Take-Off (PTO) shield mount at (2), using the previously removed hardware. Select the appropriate mounting holes on the tongue to position the shield mount around the output shaft location.

3657-17

1

3657-22

2

1411_3_16

3

4. Remove any shaft protection from the gearbox splines, and apply a thin coat of grease to the splines. Install the appropriate primary PTO shaft (1) to the bottom shaft of gearbox.

5. Install the bolt (2) and the locknut; torque to 163 N·m (120 lb ft).

NOTICE: The PTO shafts are very heavy and awkward; use caution not to drop the shaft assemblies as personal injury or damage to the CV joints may result.

NOTE: Do not overtorque; locknuts are Class C, and are limited to 163 N·m (120 lb ft).

6. Check for proper gearbox oil level at (3), and top off with TUTELA HYPOIDE EP GEAR LUBE SAE 80W-90 or CNH HYPOIDE SSL SYNTHETIC GEAR LUBE 75W-90 (synthetic) if necessary. If filling the gearbox for the first time, use approximately 650 mL (22 US fl oz) of the specified gear oil.

7. Install the front PTO shield using four bolts.

8. Slide the rear PTO shield over the secondary PTO shaft. Install the secondary PTO shaft (1) by sliding the yoke end onto the output shaft of the step-up gearbox.

9. Install two bolts (2) and locknuts; torque to 163 N·m (120 lb ft).

NOTE: Do not over-torque; locknuts are Class C, and are limited to 163 N·m (120 lb ft).

NOTICE: The secondary PTO shaft is very heavy and awkward; use caution not to drop the shaft assembly as personal injury or damage to the CV joint may result.

10. Install the rear shield onto the retaining pins.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 15

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Remove - Swivel gearbox WARNING Heavy object!

ALWAYS use adequate lifting equipment (heavy-duty hoist, loader, or forklift) to lift the component.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W0101A

1. Support the swivel tongue with a suitable lifting device or forklift. If the swivel tongue is equipped with a drawbar hitch, use the jack stand to support the tongue.

2. Remove the hitch option (2-point or drawbar), not shown, from the swivel gearbox.

93098052

1

930900472

2

930900473

3

3. Place a suitable drain pan under the swivel gearbox and remove the drain plug (1) to empty the upper gearbox.

4. Place a suitable drain pan under the swivel gearbox and remove the drain plug (1) and empty the lower gearbox.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 16

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

5. Remove the eight bolts and sixteen flat washers (1) that secure the swivel gearbox (2) to the swivel tongue (3).

NOTICE: Use adequate lifting equipment, not shown, to support the swivel gearbox for removal to prevent gearbox damage.

93098052

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 17

4

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Disassemble - Swivel gearbox 1. Remove plugs (1) (2) and (3) from the upper and lower gearbox.

2. Remove the elbow and breather assembly (4) from the gearboxes.

93100155

1

93100156

2

93100157

3

93100157

4

3. Remove bolts (1) from extension housing and disassemble the upper gearbox (2) from the extension housing.

4. Remove the bolts (1) from the extension housing and disassemble the lower gearbox (2) from the extension housing.

Upper gearbox disassembly 5. Remove cap (1) and oil seal (2) from housing.

6. Remove the snap ring (3) and the shim (4). Hit the shaft (5) from side (A) in order to extract it from the housing.

7. Retrieve the outer bearing (6), the pinion (7), and the inner bearing (8).

8. Remove the inner bearing (1), the snap ring (2), and the spacer (3) from the shaft (4).

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 18

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

9. Remove the snap ring (1), the shim (2), and the outer bearing (3) from the housing.

93100158

5

93100159

6

93100160

7

93100161

8

Lower gearbox disassembly 10. Remove the cap (1) and the oil seal (2) from the housing. Remove the snap ring (3) and the shim (4). Hit the shaft (5) from side (B) in order to extract it from the housing.

11. Retrieve the bearing (6) and the snap ring (7) from the shaft.

12. Remove the snap ring (1), the shim (2), and the bearing (3) from the lower gearbox housing.

13. Remove the cotter pin (1) from the castle nut (2). Remove the castle nut from the shaft. Hit the shaft (3) from side (C) in order to remove it from the extensions.

NOTE: Apply adhesive tape to the splines shaft to prevent damage to the oil seals.

14. Retrieve the shim (4), the protective shield (5), and the inner bearings (6).

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 19

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

15. Remove the cotter pin (1) from the castle nut (2). Remove the castle nut from the shaft.

16. Press the bearing (3) off of the shaft (4). Retrieve the shim (5) and the protective shield (6).

93100161

9

17. Break loose and remove the nut (1). Hit the extension from side (C) in order to remove it from the housing.

NOTICE: When removing the extension from the housing, make sure not to damage the threaded side.

18. Retrieve the protective washer (3), the bearing (4), the protective washer (3), and the O-ring (5). Remove the inner bearing from the extension housing. Remove the outer bearing from the extension housing.

19. Remove the oil seals (6) using a punch and hammer.

93100162

10

93100163

11

20. Remove the inner bearings (1) from the extension housing (2).

21. Remove the oil seal (3) using a punch and hammer.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 20

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Assemble - Swivel gearbox Clean all the components from remaining grease and silicone.

Replace any damaged parts.

When assembling the ball bearings, pay attention to not put any pressure on the cages, in order to avoid any damage.

When assembling oil seals, avoid contact with cutting parts, in order to prevent any damage to the inner lip.

1. Install the oil seal (1) inside the extension housing (2).

2. Install the two outer bearings (3) inside the extension housing.

93100164

1

93100165

2

93100166

3

3. Install the protective washer (1) and the inner bearing (2) on the extension housing (3).

4. Apply a grease film around the O-ring (4) and install it on the extension.

NOTE: Apply adhesive tape around extension threads in order to prevent oil seal damage.

5. Pack the tapered bearings (1) with NEW HOLLAND AMBRA GR-9 MULTI-PURPOSE GREASE. 6. Assemble the pre-mounted extension (2) inside the extension (3).

7. Install the inner bearing (1) and the protective washer (4).

8. Apply LOCTITEŽ 270 on the threaded nut (5). Install nut and tighten, in order to obtain a bearing preload of 9.8 - 11.8 N¡m (86.7 - 104.4 lb in). Stake the nut using a chisel and hammer.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 21

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

9. Install the oil seals (1) in the extension housing (2).

Apply a film of grease on both oil seals.

10. Install the outer bearings (3) in extension housing. Fill the space between the two taper roller bearings with NEW HOLLAND AMBRA GR-9 MULTI-PURPOSE GREASE.

20100171

4

93100167

5

93100169

6

20100172

7

11. Assemble the inner bearing (1), the protective washer (2), the shim (3), and the pinion gear (4) on the pinion shaft (5).

12. Tighten the castle nut (6) against the pinion gear (4) until you achieve a measurement of 48.7 mm (1.9 in) at (7). Insert the cotter pin (8) in the nearest hole and bend the legs back.

13. Apply adhesive tape around the splined end of shaft (1) to prevent oil seal damage.

14. Install the pre-assembled shaft (1) inside the extension housing. Install the inner bearing (2), the shim (3), the protective washer (4), the gear (5), and the castle nut (6).

15. Tighten the castle nut until a bearing preload of 0.49 - 1.18 N¡m (4.3 - 10.4 lb in) is obtained. Locate the nearest cotter pin hole. Secure the castle nut with the cotter pin (7).

Assemble lower gearbox 16. Install the inner bearing (1) and the snap ring (2) on the shaft (3). Insert the gear (4) inside the housing.

Install the pre-assembled shaft (3) inside the housing and engage it in the gear (4).

17. Install the tapered roll bearing (5), the shim (6), and the snap ring (7). Install the outer ring (8), the shim (9), and the snap ring (10).

18. Hit the shaft from the side (B) in order to set the axis.

19. Verify the bearing preload is 0 - 0.29 N¡m (0 - 2.6 lb in). If the preload is not correct, change the shim setting (9).

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 22

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Assemble upper gearbox 20. Install the inner bearing (1), the snap ring (2), and the spacer (3) on the shaft (4). Insert the gear (5) inside the housing. Install the pre-assembled shaft (4) inside the housing and engage it in the gear (5).

21. Install the tapered roll bearing (6), the shim (7), and the snap ring (8). Install the outer ring (9), the shim (10), and the snap ring (11).

22. Hit the shaft from the side (A) in order to set the axis.

23. Verify the bearing preload is 0 - 0.29 N·m (0 - 2.6 lb in). If the preload is not correct, change the shim setting (10).

20100173

8

93100168

9

24. Apply a bead of LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant between housing (1) and extensions contact surfaces.

25. Apply bluing compound on the gear (2) teeth. Assemble the pre-mounted extensions. Install the bolts (3) and snug-tighten.

26. Lock the shaft (4) and rotate the shaft (5) in the direction of operation. Verify the backlash between the gears is between 0.16 - 0.43 mm (0.006 - 0.017 in).

If the backlash is not within specification, change the shim set (6) and (7).

NOTICE: When changing the shim sets, you must set the preload again.

27. Install the bolts (3) and torque to 76 - 81 N·m (56 60 lb ft).

28. Apply a bead of LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant between the housing (1) and the extension contact surfaces.

29. Apply bluing compound on the gear (2) teeth. Assemble the pre-mounted gearbox. Install the bolts (3) and snug-tighten.

30. Lock the shaft (4) and rotate the shaft (5) in the direction of operation. Verify the backlash between the gears is between 0.16 - 0.43 mm (0.006 - 0.017 in).

If the backlash is not within specification, change the shim set (6) and (7).

NOTICE: When changing the shim sets, you must set the preload again.

31. Install the bolts (3) and torque to 76 - 81 N·m (56 60 lb ft).

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 23

20100170

10

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

32. Install the caps (1) and the oil seals (2).

93100155

11

93100155

12

33. Install the plugs (1) (2) and (3). Torque the plugs 29.4 N·m (22 lb ft).

34. Fill the gearbox with TUTELA HYPOIDE EP GEAR LUBE SAE 80W-90 or CNH HYPOIDE SSL SYNTHETIC GEAR LUBE 75W-90 (synthetic).

Swivel gearbox capacities: • Lower gearbox: 1800 mL (61 US fl oz) • Upper gearbox: 650 mL (22 US fl oz) 35. Apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the threads of the gearbox filler/breather (4) and install the assembly into the gearbox such that it is accessible for filling.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 24

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Gearbox

Gearbox - Install - Swivel gearbox WARNING Heavy object!

ALWAYS use adequate lifting equipment (heavy-duty hoist, loader, or forklift) to lift the component.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W0101A

1. Install the swivel gearbox (1) to the swivel tongue (2) and secure with the eight bolts and sixteen flat washers (3) from removal. Install two flat washers per bolt.

NOTICE: Use adequate lifting equipment, not shown, to support the swivel gearbox for installation to prevent gearbox damage.

93098052

1

93098054

2

930900476

3

2. Attach the 2-point hitch option (1) or the drawbar option (2), not shown, on the swivel gearbox..

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 25

Index Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Gearbox - 220 Gearbox - Assemble - Step-up gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

Gearbox - Assemble - Swivel gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21

Gearbox - Disassemble - Step-up gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

Gearbox - Disassemble - Swivel gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18

Gearbox - Exploded view of swivel gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

Gearbox - Install - Step-up gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15

Gearbox - Install - Swivel gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25

Gearbox - Overview - step-up gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Gearbox - Remove - Step-up gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

Gearbox - Remove - Swivel gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16

Gearbox - Service instruction - to convert step-up gearbox for different PTO speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

48068916 04/11/2016

31.4 [31.220] / 26

Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Clutches - 225

H7230 H7330

48068916 04/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 1

Contents Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Clutches - 225

TECHNICAL DATA Main drive slip clutch Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

FUNCTIONAL DATA Clutches Exploded view of the slip with overrunning clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Main drive slip clutch Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

SERVICE Main drive slip clutch Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Inspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Resurface (burnish) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Overrunning clutch Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Inspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

48068916 04/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 2

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Clutches

Main drive slip clutch - Technical Data The slip clutch is set at 1450 N·m (1069 lb ft) of (static) breakaway torque.

50012123

48068916 04/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 3

1

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Clutches

Clutches - Exploded view of the slip with overrunning clutch

86065291

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Bolt Flange Yoke Adjustment Band Friction Lining Driving Plate Inner Plate Locking Plate Allen Bolt Overrunning Clutch Plug

1

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 4

Overrunning Clutch Housing Grease Fitting Pressure Plate Belleville Spring Snap Ring Key and Spring Kit Hub Tapered Pin

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Clutches

Main drive slip clutch - Overview The slip clutch (1) on the disc mower-conditioner is part of the secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) drive shaft and is mounted on the input shaft of the header gearbox. The clutch is set to slip in the event an overload occurs during machine operation.

Prior to the start of each season and after long periods of non-use the slip clutch should be burnished to ensure it is not locked up.

50012123

1

Wear Inspection The amount of wear on the slip clutch friction discs can be determined without disassembling the clutch.

1. Unlatch the two rubber handles and open the left-hand side door.

2. Inspect the clearance between the pressure plate tangs (1) and the housing (2); if the clearance is less than 1.6 mm (1/16 in), the friction discs are worn out and require replacement.

50056847N

48068916 04/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 5

2

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Clutches

Main drive slip clutch - Remove WARNING Moving parts!

Disengage the Power Take-Off (PTO), turn off the engine, and remove the key. Wait for all movement to stop before you leave the operator's position. Never adjust, lubricate, clean, or remove a blockage of crop material when the engine is on.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W0112B

1. Loosen and remove the clamp (1) from the hub of the overrunning clutch.

2. Turn out the center bolt (2) and slide the clutch from the gearbox input shaft.

3. Slide the two drive shaft halves apart.

50012123

48068916 04/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 6

1

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Clutches

Main drive slip clutch - Disassemble Figures 1 and 2 show the slip clutch removed from the secondary Power Take-Off (PTO) shaft for clarity.

1. Remove the bolts and the locknuts from the clamp hub (1) at the rear of the clutch.

2. Loosen the bolts (2) around the clutch housing, 1/2 turn at a time, until all six bolts are loose. Carefully remove the six bolts and the nuts from the clutch and discard them.

50006842

1

50006843

2

3. Remove the internal components one at a time over the clamp hub at the rear of the clutch.

The clutch contains a compression plate (1), a disc spring (2), a ribbed pressure plate (3), a friction disc (4), a separator plate (5), and a friction disc (6).

4. Discard the friction discs (4) and (6).

48068916 04/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 7

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Clutches

Main drive slip clutch - Inspect 1. Inspect the separator plate (1) for discoloration, warpage, or cracking. Replace the separator plate if any damage is found. Both faces of the separator plate should have a rough surface; replace the plate if either face is worn smooth. Inspect the inner drive tangs for excessive wear; replace the plate if the drive tangs are rounded off or worn more than 1/3 through.

2. Inspect the ribbed pressure plate (2) for discoloration or cracking. Replace the pressure plate if any damage is found. Lay a straight edge across the face of the pressure plate; replace the pressure plate if it is warped more than 1.6 mm (1/16 in).

1431-4-3

1

20006843N

2

3. Inspect the disc spring (1) for discoloration or cracking; replace the disc spring if any damage is found. Use a depth micrometer or calipers to measure the height of the disc spring when placed on a flat surface; the height should be between 10.2 - 10.7 mm (0.402 - 0.421 in).

Replace the disc spring if it is less than the specified height range.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 8

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Clutches

Main drive slip clutch - Assemble 1. Install a new friction disc (1) into the clutch housing, followed by the separator plate (2) and another friction disc (3).

50006844

1

20006845N

2

20006846N

3

50006847N

4

2. Install the pressure plate (1) in the housing with the flat surface facing the friction disc; align the tabs on the pressure plate with the relief notches in the housing.

3. Position the disc spring (1) over the clutch hub so that the inside diameter of the disc spring contacts the ribs on the pressure plate.

4. Position the compression plate (1) over the clutch hub against the outer diameter of the disc spring and install new bolts (2) through the compression plate and the grooves in the housing. Insert new nuts (3) into the pockets on the front of the clutch housing and thread the bolts into the nuts until snug to hold the assembly together.

5. Tighten all bolts (2) evenly until snug and then one additional 1/2 turn each to hold the clutch components securely and to provide the setting for running in the clutch.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 9

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Clutches

Main drive slip clutch - Install 1. Install the drive shaft and the slip clutch assembly so that the two crimped splines align with the slot in the front of the secondary drive shaft. Slide the two drive shaft halves together.

2. Slide the slip clutch onto the input shaft as far as possible. Thread the bolt (1) inside the slip clutch hub into the end of the shaft, and tighten as much as possible to pull the slip clutch hub securely onto the tapered end of the gearbox shaft.

3. Torque the two 1/2 in x 3 in Grade 8 bolts (2) and locknuts at the rear of the clutch to 163 N¡m (120 lb ft).

NOTE: Do not over tighten. The locknuts are Class C, and are limited to 163 N¡m (120 lb ft).

Burnish the slip clutch. See Main drive slip clutch Resurface (31.225).

48068916 04/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 10

50012123

1

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Clutches

Main drive slip clutch - Resurface (burnish) Prior to the start of each season and after long periods of non-use, the slip clutch should be burnished to ensure it is not locked up.

1. Make sure that the tractor is shut off, if connected to the unit. Loosen the bolts (2), 1/2 turn at a time, until the bolts are just loose. Tighten all of the bolts one half turn.

2. Attach a tractor to the disc mower-conditioner as outlined in the operator’s manual.

3. Operate the tractor at 1/3 throttle, and engage the tractor Power Take-Off (PTO) for several seconds, or until the slip clutch visibly smokes. At this time, disengage the tractor PTO. Turn the tractor off. If the clutch does not slip, the clutch must be disassembled to unlock the friction discs.

4. After slipping the clutch, tighten the bolts (1), 1/2 turn at a time, until the compression plate (2), contacts the clutch housing (3).

NOTICE: The slip clutch is set at 1450 N¡m (1069 lb ft) of (static) breakaway torque. Do not alter the slip clutch setting or damage to the machine could result.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 11

40044037

1

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Clutches

Overrunning clutch - Disassemble If the overrunning clutch does not operate when the tractor Power Take-Off (PTO) is disengaged, the overrunning clutch must be disassembled for inspection.

Remove the slip clutch from the unit . It is possible to repair the overrunning clutch without disassembling the slip clutch.

1. Turn out the bolts (1) that hold the overrunning clutch to the slip clutch housing.

50006847N

1

50006848

2

50006849

3

50006850

4

2. Remove the snap ring (1) and lift off the washer (2) from the hub of the overrunning clutch.

3. Slide the hub (1) from the yoke shaft (2). Capture the pawls and leaf springs as the hub is slid from the shaft.

Turn the set screw (1) from the ball bearing cavity. Rotate the yoke shaft while holding the hole down until all the bearings fall out; there are thirty balls in the overrunning clutch bearing cavity .It may be necessary to apply a small amount of penetrating fluid to assist in removing the ball bearings

48068916 04/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 12

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Clutches

Overrunning clutch - Inspect 1. Inspect the overrunning pawls and ramps on the inner diameter of the outer overrunning clutch hub for wear or damage; replace the components as required.

2. Inspect the overrunning hub and yoke bearing grooves and mating surfaces for galling or other damage; replace as necessary. Discard the overrunning bearing balls and replace with new parts.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 13

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Clutches

Overrunning clutch - Assemble 1. Apply a film of grease to the inner (1) and outer (2) race of the ball bearing cavity.

50006851

1

50006852

2

50006853

3

2. Set the outer yoke shaft onto the inner shaft. Insert the ball bearings (1) into the cavity (2) until all thirty are in place. Turn in the set screw (3) and tighten it securely. Apply grease through the zerk while rotating the overrunning hub to distribute the lubricant evenly.

Wipe away and excess grease.

3. Slide the spring washer (1) in place over the yoke shaft.

Apply grease to the spring recesses in the shaft and set the leaf springs (2) into place with the concave side facing toward the center.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 14

Power Take-Off (PTO) - Clutches

4. Apply a film of grease to the pawls (1) and set each in place on top of the leaf springs. Slide the hub (2) over the pawls. Secure the hub in place with the washer (3) and snap ring (4).

50006854

5. Install slip clutch.

48068916 04/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 15

4

Index Power Take-Off (PTO) - 31 Clutches - 225 Clutches - Exploded view of the slip with overrunning clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

Main drive slip clutch - Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

Main drive slip clutch - Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

Main drive slip clutch - Inspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

Main drive slip clutch - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

Main drive slip clutch - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

Main drive slip clutch - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

Main drive slip clutch - Resurface (burnish) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

Main drive slip clutch - Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Overrunning clutch - Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14

Overrunning clutch - Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12

Overrunning clutch - Inspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13

48068916 04/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 16

48068916 04/11/2016

31.5 [31.225] / 17

CNH Industrial America New Holland Site 100 Brubaker Avenue New Holland, Pennsylvania United States 17557 SERVICE - Technical Publications & Tools

PRINTED IN U.S.A. Š 2016 CNH Industrial America LLC. All rights reserved. No part of the text or illustrations of this publication may be reproduced.

NEW HOLLAND policy is one of continuous improvement and the right to change prices, specification or equipment at any time without notices is reserved.

All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weight are approximate only and the illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your NEW HOLLAND Dealer.

48068916 04/11/2016 EN

SERVICE MANUAL Hydraulic systems H7230 H7330

48068916 04/11/2016

35

Contents Hydraulic systems - 35

[35.000] Hydraulic systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.1 [35.410] Header or attachment height system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.2 [35.415] Header or attachment tilting system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.3 [35.947] Frame positioning swinging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.4

48068916 04/11/2016

35

Hydraulic systems - 35 Hydraulic systems - 000

H7230 H7330

48068916 04/11/2016

35.1 [35.000] / 1

Contents Hydraulic systems - 35 Hydraulic systems - 000

FUNCTIONAL DATA Hydraulic systems Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

48068916 04/11/2016

35.1 [35.000] / 2

Hydraulic systems - Hydraulic systems

Hydraulic systems - Overview WARNING Escaping fluid!

Relieve all pressure before disconnecting fluid lines or performing work on the hydraulic system.

Make sure all components are in good condition and tighten all connections before pressurizing the system. DO NOT use your hand to check for leaks. Use a piece of cardboard or paper.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W1140A

1431-8-8

1

Hydraulic diagram

Ref. (1) (2) (3)

Component

Ref.

Tractor remote valves 1.9939 mm (0.0785 in) Orifice (A component of (6)) Master cylinder

Ref.

Circuit

(X)

Tongue shift

Component

(4)

Tilt cylinder (If equipped)

(5)

Slave cylinder

(6)

Swing cylinder

Hydraulic circuit type Ref. Circuit (Y)

Header lift

48068916 04/11/2016

35.1 [35.000] / 3

Ref.

Circuit

(Z)

Header tilt

Index Hydraulic systems - 35 Hydraulic systems - 000 Hydraulic systems - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

48068916 04/11/2016

35.1 [35.000] / 4

3

Hydraulic systems - 35 Header or attachment height system - 410

H7230 H7330

48068916 04/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 1

Contents Hydraulic systems - 35 Header or attachment height system - 410

SERVICE Positioning cylinder Remove - Master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Disassemble - Master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Inspect - Master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Assemble - Master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Install - Master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Remove - Slave cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Disassemble - Slave cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Inspect - Slave cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Assemble - Slave cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Install - Slave cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

48068916 04/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 2

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

Positioning cylinder - Remove - Master cylinder WARNING Escaping fluid!

Hydraulic fluid or diesel fuel leaking under pressure can penetrate the skin and cause infection or other injury. To prevent personal injury: Relieve all pressure before disconnecting fluid lines or performing work on the hydraulic system. Before applying pressure, make sure all connections are tight and all components are in good condition. Never use your hand to check for suspected leaks under pressure. Use a piece of cardboard or wood for this purpose. If injured by leaking fluid, see your doctor immediately.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W0178A

NOTE: Only engage the transport locks when indicated.

1. Raise the header with tractor hydraulics 2.

DANGER Crushing hazard!

The safety lock built into the header lift system locks the header in the raised position. Engage the safety lock before working under a raised header Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.

D0094A

Engage the header transport lock on the left-hand side by pivoting lever (1) forward. Do not engage the header transport lock on the right-hand side.

86080761

1

NHIL12HT00303AA

2

3. Place one or more large wood blocks (1), sufficient to support the weight of the header, under the cutterbar on the right-hand side 4. Lower the header.

5.

DANGER Heavy parts!

Support designated component(s) with adequate lifting equipment.

Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.

D0018A

Raise the trail frame as shown in figure 2 to remove hydraulic pressure from the right-hand cylinder.

48068916 04/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 3

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

6. Remove the hoses (1) at the cylinder ports.

7. Remove the pins (2) and (3) to remove the master lift cylinder.

86080828

48068916 04/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 4

3

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

Positioning cylinder - Disassemble - Master cylinder 1. Remove the set screw (1).

1411_9_6

1

1411_9_7

2

1411_9_8

3

2. Tap the cylinder head (1) into the cylinder far enough to remove the retaining ring (2) with a screwdriver.

3. Pull the complete piston rod assembly out of the cylinder barrel.

NOTE: All O-rings and seals should be replaced.

4. Capture the piston rod using a bar through the hole in the end, and then remove the rod nut (1). Slide off the piston (2) and the cylinder head (3).

48068916 04/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 5

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

Positioning cylinder - Inspect - Master cylinder 1. Examine the parts for wear or nicks. Remove any burrs from inside of the cylinder.

2. Remove all seals and O-rings, carefully noting the lip position on the seals.

48068916 04/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 6

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

Positioning cylinder - Assemble - Master cylinder 1. Lubricate all seals, O-rings, and sliding surfaces before assembly.

2. Install a new rod seal inside of the cylinder head (1).

3. Drive a new wiper seal (2) in place in the face of the cylinder head.

4. Install an O-ring (3) and back-up washer in the outer groove on the cylinder head, with the back-up washer (4) toward the outer face of the cylinder head.

5. Slide a new retaining ring and the cylinder head assembly over the piston rod.

1411_9_9

1

1411_9_8

2

1411_9_7

3

6. Capture the piston rod using a bar through the hole in the end.

7. Install the piston (2) with the recessed end facing out.

8. Install the locknut (1).

9. Torque the locknut to 210 N¡m (155 lb ft).

10. Install the piston seal (3).

11. Lubricate the cylinder barrel with oil, and carefully insert the complete piston rod assembly into the barrel, using caution not to damage the seals on the retaining ring groove.

12. Push the cylinder head into the cylinder barrel far enough to expose the retaining ring groove, and install the retaining ring (2). Pull the piston rod outwards to seat the cylinder head (1) against the retaining ring.

13. Install the set screw, aligning it with the groove in the cylinder head.

48068916 04/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 7

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

Positioning cylinder - Install - Master cylinder 1. Secure cylinder to the machine with pins (2) and (3).

2. Install the hydraulic hose (1) to the cylinder ports.

3. Raise the header, and then disengage the header transport lock and remove the wood blocks.

86080828

48068916 04/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 8

1

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

Positioning cylinder - Remove - Slave cylinder WARNING Escaping fluid!

Hydraulic fluid or diesel fuel leaking under pressure can penetrate the skin and cause infection or other injury. To prevent personal injury: Relieve all pressure before disconnecting fluid lines or performing work on the hydraulic system. Before applying pressure, make sure all connections are tight and all components are in good condition. Never use your hand to check for suspected leaks under pressure. Use a piece of cardboard or wood for this purpose. If injured by leaking fluid, see your doctor immediately.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W0178A

1. Raise the header with tractor hydraulics 2. Place a hard block of wood (1) approximately 50 mm (2 in) thick into the space between the pivot point for the trail frame and the wheel arm.

3. Lower the header to the ground to remove all pressure from the hydraulic cylinder.

NHIL12HT00302AA

1

NHIL12HT00302AA

2

4. Remove the hose (2) at the cylinder port.

5. Remove the pins (3) and (4) to remove the slave lift cylinder.

48068916 04/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 9

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

Positioning cylinder - Disassemble - Slave cylinder 1. Remove the set screw (1).

1411_9_13

1

1411_9_13A

2

1411_9_14

3

2. Tap the cylinder head (1) into the cylinder far enough to remove the retaining ring (2).

3. Pull the complete piston rod assembly out of the cylinder barrel.

NOTE: All O-rings and seals should be replaced.

4. Capture the piston rod using a bar through the hole in the end, and then remove rod nut (1).

5. Slide the piston (2) and the cylinder head (3) off of the cylinder rod.

48068916 04/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 10

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

Positioning cylinder - Inspect - Slave cylinder 1. Examine the parts for wear or nicks. Remove any burrs from inside of the cylinder.

2. Remove all seals, carefully noting the lip position on the seals.

48068916 04/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 11

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

Positioning cylinder - Assemble - Slave cylinder 1. Lubricate all seals and sliding surfaces before assembly.

2. Install a new back-up washer and O-ring in the inner bore of the cylinder head (1) with the back-up washer towards the outer face.

3. Drive a new wiper seal (2) into the outer face of the cylinder head.

4. Install a back-up washer and O-ring into the outer groove (3) in the cylinder head, with the back-up washer towards the outer face.

5. Slide a new retaining ring and the cylinder head assembly over the piston rod.

6. Install a new seal (4) on the piston (5).

1411_9_14

1

1411_9_13A

2

7. Install the piston with the recessed end facing outwards.

8. Install the locknut (6) and torque it to 210 N¡m (155 lb ft).

9. Torque the locknut to 210 N¡m (155 lb ft).

10. Lubricate the cylinder barrel with oil, and carefully insert the complete piston rod assembly into the barrel, using caution not to damage the seals on the retaining ring groove.

11. Push the cylinder head into the cylinder barrel far enough to expose the retaining ring groove, and install retaining ring (2).

12. Pull the piston rod outwards to seat the cylinder head (1) against the retaining ring.

13. Install the set screw, aligning it with the groove in the cylinder head.

48068916 04/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 12

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment height system

Positioning cylinder - Install - Slave cylinder 1. Secure the cylinder to the machine with the pins (1) and (2).

2. Install the hydraulic hose (3) to the cylinder port.

3. Raise the header, and then disengage the header transport lock and remove the wood blocks.

86080761

48068916 04/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 13

1

Index Hydraulic systems - 35 Header or attachment height system - 410 Positioning cylinder - Assemble - Master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

Positioning cylinder - Assemble - Slave cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12

Positioning cylinder - Disassemble - Master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

Positioning cylinder - Disassemble - Slave cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

Positioning cylinder - Inspect - Master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

Positioning cylinder - Inspect - Slave cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

Positioning cylinder - Install - Master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

Positioning cylinder - Install - Slave cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13

Positioning cylinder - Remove - Master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Positioning cylinder - Remove - Slave cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

48068916 04/11/2016

35.2 [35.410] / 14

Hydraulic systems - 35 Header or attachment tilting system - 415

H7230 H7330

48068916 04/11/2016

35.3 [35.415] / 1

Contents Hydraulic systems - 35 Header or attachment tilting system - 415

SERVICE Cylinder Remove - Tilt cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Disassemble - Tilt cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Inspect - Tilt cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Assemble - Tilt cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Install - Tilt cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

48068916 04/11/2016

35.3 [35.415] / 2

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment tilting system

Cylinder - Remove - Tilt cylinder 1. Place the header tilt position pin in the 10 ° position.

Position jack stands (1) or blocking at the front of the header to support it in a horizontal position when it is lowered. Lower the header fully to the ground, and allow the header to roll forward onto the jack stands to relieve the pressure on the tilt cylinder mounting pins.

1411_9_1

1

86080771

2

2. Disconnect the hydraulic hose (1) from the tilt cylinder.

3. Remove the front and rear anchor bolts (2) and remove the tilt cylinder. Note the position of washers used to center the cylinder rod.

48068916 04/11/2016

35.3 [35.415] / 3

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment tilting system

Cylinder - Disassemble - Tilt cylinder 1. Remove the 90 ° elbow (1) from the cylinder port, if not already removed. This will allow removal of the limit channel.

NOTE: Art for reference only.

19990099

1

1411_9_3

2

1411_9_4

3

2. Remove the set screw (1).

3. Tap the cylinder head (2) into the cylinder far enough to remove the retaining ring (3) with a screwdriver.

4. Pull the complete piston rod assembly out of the cylinder barrel.

NOTE: All O-rings and seals should be replaced.

5. Capture the piston rod using a bar through the one of the holes in the rod, and then remove rod nut, Slide off the piston (2) and the cylinder head (3).

48068916 04/11/2016

35.3 [35.415] / 4

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment tilting system

Cylinder - Inspect - Tilt cylinder 1. Examine the parts for wear or nicks. Remove any burrs on the inside of the cylinder.

2. Remove all seals and O-rings, carefully noting the lip position on the seals.

3. Remove and clean the breather on the cylinder barrel.

48068916 04/11/2016

35.3 [35.415] / 5

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment tilting system

Cylinder - Assemble - Tilt cylinder 1. Lubricate all seals, O-rings, and sliding surfaces before assembly with clean hydraulic oil.

2. Install a new rod seal inside the cylinder head (1). Drive a new wiper seal (2) in place in the face of the cylinder head. Install an O-ring in the outer groove on the cylinder head. Slide the cylinder head assembly over the piston rod.

3. Capture the piston rod using a bar through one of the holes in the rod. Install the piston (3) and the locknut (4).

4. Torque the locknut to 210 N¡m (155 lb ft).

5. Install the piston seal (5).

1411_9_4

1

1411_9_3

2

6. Lubricate the cylinder barrel with hydraulic oil, and carefully insert the complete piston rod assembly into the barrel, using caution not to damage the seals on the retaining ring groove. Push the cylinder head into the cylinder barrel far enough to expose the retaining ring groove, and install the retaining ring (1). Pull the piston rod outwards to seat the cylinder head against the retaining ring.

7. Install the set screw (2), aligning it with the groove in the cylinder head (3).

48068916 04/11/2016

35.3 [35.415] / 6

Hydraulic systems - Header or attachment tilting system

Cylinder - Install - Tilt cylinder 1. Secure the tilt cylinder to the machine with the front and rear anchor bolts (1) from removal.

2. Secure the hydraulic hose (2) to the tilt cylinder.

86080771

48068916 04/11/2016

35.3 [35.415] / 7

1

Index Hydraulic systems - 35 Header or attachment tilting system - 415 Cylinder - Assemble - Tilt cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

Cylinder - Disassemble - Tilt cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

Cylinder - Inspect - Tilt cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

Cylinder - Install - Tilt cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

Cylinder - Remove - Tilt cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

48068916 04/11/2016

35.3 [35.415] / 8

Hydraulic systems - 35 Frame positioning swinging - 947

H7230 H7330

48068916 04/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 1

Contents Hydraulic systems - 35 Frame positioning swinging - 947

SERVICE Cylinder Remove - Swing cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Disassemble - Swing cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Inspect - Swing cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Assemble - Swing cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Install - Swing cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

48068916 04/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 2

Hydraulic systems - Frame positioning swinging

Cylinder - Remove - Swing cylinder 1. Place a pan under the cylinder to capture any hydraulic oil.

2. Loosen the hydraulic hoses (1) to relieve any pressure that is in the system.

3. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the cylinder.

4. Remove the hydraulic lock out valve assembly (2) from the front cylinder port (3).

83082850

1

20090978

2

5. Remove the rear hydraulic fitting and install plug (1).

6. Remove the front hydraulic fitting. Remove the orifice (not shown) and install a plug (2).

7. Remove the swing cylinder from the machine by removing the two pins and two cotter pins (3).

48068916 04/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 3

Hydraulic systems - Frame positioning swinging

Cylinder - Disassemble - Swing cylinder 1. Use a spanner wrench or a heavy punch and hammer to remove the nut (1).

1411_9_24

1

1411_9_25

2

1411_9_26

3

2. Tap the cylinder head (1) into the cylinder far enough to remove the snap ring (2) with a screwdriver.

3. Pull the complete piston rod assembly out of the barrel.

NOTE: The O-rings and seals should be replaced.

4. Capture the piston rod using a bar through the clevis, and then remove the rod nut (1).

5. Slide the piston (2), the cylinder head (3), and the nut (4) off of the piston rod.

48068916 04/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 4

Hydraulic systems - Frame positioning swinging

Cylinder - Inspect - Swing cylinder 1. Examine the parts for wear or nicks. Remove any burrs that are inside of the cylinder.

2. Remove all O-rings and seals, carefully noting the lip position of the seals.

48068916 04/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 5

Hydraulic systems - Frame positioning swinging

Cylinder - Assemble - Swing cylinder 1. Lubricate all O-rings, seals, and sliding surfaces before assembly.

2. Slide the nut (1) and a new retaining ring over the piston rod.

3. Install a new rod seal inside cylinder head (2).

4. Drive a new wiper seal (3) into the outer face of the cylinder head.

5. Install a back-up washer (4) and an O-ring (5) in the outer groove of the cylinder head, with the back-up washer towards the outer face.

6. Slide the cylinder head assembly over the piston rod.

1411_9_27

1

1411_9_26

2

1411_9_25

3

7. Capture the piston rod using a bar through the clevis.

8. Install piston (2) and the locknut (1).

9. Torque the locknut to 353 N¡m (260 lb ft).

10. Install a new seal (3) onto the piston.

11. Lubricate the cylinder barrel with oil, and carefully insert the complete piston rod assembly into the barrel (1) using caution not to damage the seals on the retaining ring groove.

12. Push the cylinder head into the cylinder barrel far enough to expose the retaining ring groove, and install retaining ring (2).

13. Pull the piston rod outwards to seat the cylinder head against the retaining ring.

48068916 04/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 6

Hydraulic systems - Frame positioning swinging

14. Install the nut (1) and torque to 230 N¡m (170 lb ft).

1411_9_24A

48068916 04/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 7

4

Hydraulic systems - Frame positioning swinging

Cylinder - Install - Swing cylinder NOTE: Use LOCTITE® 567™ PST PIPE SEALANT where connections do not have O-rings or are compression fittings.

1. Install the barrel end of the swing cylinder (1) to the main frame using the clevis pin and the cotter pin (2).

2. Install the rod end of the swing cylinder (3) to the tongue by inserting a clevis pin (4) through the top of the cylinder clevis and tongue plate, as shown. Secure the clevis pin with a cotter pin. The pressure in the cylinder may need to be relieved to be able to extend the cylinder to the desired length to line up with the hole in the tongue plate. This can be done by removing the cap on the rod end port (5) and pulling on the cylinder. Have a drain bucket available to catch any fluids.

20090978

1

83082850

2

3. Remove the plug and insert the orifice, not shown, into the rod end of the cylinder (1).

4. Install the 90 ° fitting (2) and the adapter (3) in the cylinder ports.

5. Install the hydraulic lock out valve assembly (4).

6. Connect hydraulic hoses (5).

48068916 04/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 8

Index Hydraulic systems - 35 Frame positioning swinging - 947 Cylinder - Assemble - Swing cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

Cylinder - Disassemble - Swing cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

Cylinder - Inspect - Swing cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

Cylinder - Install - Swing cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

Cylinder - Remove - Swing cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

48068916 04/11/2016

35.4 [35.947] / 9

CNH Industrial America New Holland Site 100 Brubaker Avenue New Holland, Pennsylvania United States 17557 SERVICE - Technical Publications & Tools

PRINTED IN U.S.A. Š 2016 CNH Industrial America LLC. All rights reserved. No part of the text or illustrations of this publication may be reproduced.

NEW HOLLAND policy is one of continuous improvement and the right to change prices, specification or equipment at any time without notices is reserved.

All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weight are approximate only and the illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your NEW HOLLAND Dealer.

48068916 04/11/2016 EN

SERVICE MANUAL Wheels H7230 H7330

48068916 04/11/2016

44

Contents Wheels - 44

[44.530] Carrying and transport wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.1

48068916 04/11/2016

44

Wheels - 44 Carrying and transport wheels - 530

H7230 H7330

48068916 04/11/2016

44.1 [44.530] / 1

Contents Wheels - 44 Carrying and transport wheels - 530

FUNCTIONAL DATA Transport wheel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

48068916 04/11/2016

44.1 [44.530] / 2

Wheels - Carrying and transport wheels

Transport wheel - Overview The disc mower-conditioner uses two 9.5L x 14L, 6-ply tubeless tires. Do not substitute a different sized tire as load carrying capacity may be compromised.

Tires should be inflated to 207 kPa (30 psi).

Limit highway transport speeds to 32 km/h (20 mph) to prevent tire failures.

Check the wheel bolt torque before operating and also after the first two and ten hours of use. Torque the wheel bolts to 156 N¡m (115 lb ft). Recheck the wheel bolt torque after every 50 hours of operation.

86080761N

48068916 04/11/2016

44.1 [44.530] / 3

1

Index Wheels - 44 Carrying and transport wheels - 530 Transport wheel - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

48068916 04/11/2016

44.1 [44.530] / 4

3

48068916 04/11/2016

44.1 [44.530] / 5

CNH Industrial America New Holland Site 100 Brubaker Avenue New Holland, Pennsylvania United States 17557 SERVICE - Technical Publications & Tools

PRINTED IN U.S.A. Š 2016 CNH Industrial America LLC. All rights reserved. No part of the text or illustrations of this publication may be reproduced.

NEW HOLLAND policy is one of continuous improvement and the right to change prices, specification or equipment at any time without notices is reserved.

All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weight are approximate only and the illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your NEW HOLLAND Dealer.

48068916 04/11/2016 EN

SERVICE MANUAL Electrical systems H7230 H7330

48068916 04/11/2016

55

Contents Electrical systems - 55

[55.404] External lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55.1

48068916 04/11/2016

55

Electrical systems - 55 External lighting - 404

H7230 H7330

48068916 04/11/2016

55.1 [55.404] / 1

Contents Electrical systems - 55 External lighting - 404

FUNCTIONAL DATA External lighting Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Turn signal and/or hazard lights General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

SERVICE Lighting control module Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Turn signal and/or hazard lights Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

48068916 04/11/2016

55.1 [55.404] / 2

Electrical systems - External lighting

External lighting - Overview Roll conditioner units

Trailing lights The trailing lights as shown should be used when towing the disc mower-conditioner on a public road.

The trailing lights consist of two amber flashing lights (1) attached to the trail frame spring towers, and red brake lights (2) attached to the inside trail frame locations.

86080759

This lighting system is intended to improve the machine visibility on public roads and warn operators of other vehicles of your actions. This machine is equipped with a lighting system that conforms to ASAE S279.16.

1

Flail conditioner units

98-210

48068916 04/11/2016

55.1 [55.404] / 3

2

Electrical systems - External lighting

Turn signal and/or hazard lights - General information Tractor lights Left-hand amber Headlights OFF Headlights ON Amber flashing lights OFF Off Amber flashing lights ON Flashing (same rate as right-hand light) Brake lamps* (brakes applied) Flashing (same rate Amber flashing as right-hand light) lamps ON -no turn indicated (tractor with brake lamps) Flashing (same rate Amber flashing as right-hand light) lamps ON -no turn indicated (no tractor brake lamps) Left-hand turn indicated Increased flash rate

Right-hand turn indicated

Illuminated, no flashing

Implement lights Right-hand red Left-hand red Off Off Dim Dim -

Right-hand amber Off Flashing (same rate as left-hand light) -

Bright*

Bright*

Bright*

Bright*

Flashing (same rate as left-hand light)

Off**

Off**

Flashing (same rate as left-hand light)

Off, dim, or flashing*** in unison with left-hand light Off or dim

Off or dim

Illuminated, no flashing

Increased flash rate Off, dim, or flashing*** in unison with right-hand light

NOTE: Check local laws or regulations concerning agricultural machinery lighting and marking.

NOTE: NEW HOLLAND recommends the use of headlights when you travel on roads. * Implement brake lights (red) to illuminate when the tractor brakes are applied (tractor with brake lights). ** If the tractor does not have brake lights, install an implement lighting control module to attain enhanced turn signal function. *** If the brake light (red) flashes in unison with the amber flasher indicating the direction of the turn (if the tractor is not equipped with brake lights), install an implement lighting control module.

NOTE: The implement lighting control module controls the amber lamps and the brake light circuits. The tail lamps are on only when the tractor park or road lights are on.

48068916 04/11/2016

55.1 [55.404] / 4

Electrical systems - External lighting

Lighting control module - Install The implement light control module provides enhanced turn signal function to tractors without brake lights.

The implement light control module, if equipped, will be mounted behind a protective cover on the left-hand side at the rear of the frame as shown in Figure [Invalid Reference].

If the mower-conditioner is not fitted with an implement light control module, a small loop harness will be installed on the machine wire harness in its place.

NOTE: An implement light module will also work with tractors that have brake lights.

30004615

1

83113271

2

93110023

3

83113272

4

1. Locate the loop harness (1).

2. Cut the wire tie (2) that binds the loop harness to the machine wiring harness. Discard the wire tie.

3. Unplug the loop harness (1) from the machine wiring harness. Plug the implement lighting control module into the machine wiring harness in place of the loop harness.

4. Mount the lighting control module (1) to the two holes in the light bracket using two 1/4 in -20 Grade 5 flange bolts and two 1/4 in -20 flange locknuts.

48068916 04/11/2016

55.1 [55.404] / 5

Electrical systems - External lighting

5. Install the protective shield (1) over the implement lighting control module and the wiring harness connection using four 1/4 in -20 Grade 5 flange bolts, four M6 lock washers, and four 1/4 in -20 Grade 5 locknuts.

30004615N

48068916 04/11/2016

55.1 [55.404] / 6

5

Electrical systems - External lighting

Turn signal and/or hazard lights - Install NOTE: Left-hand and right-right sides are determined by standing behind the unit, looking in the direction of travel.

Before installing the lights, the wire harness must first be installed.

Wiring harness 1. Push a piece of stiff wire into the rear opening of the tongue (1) and out the front opening.

2. Attach the wiring harness to the stiff wire, and pull it into the tongue.

20053232

1

86080759

2

3. Route the wiring harness through the hose clamps at the front and rear openings of the tongue; do not tighten the clamps at this time.

4. Route the left-hand side portion of the wiring harness through the hose clamp on the flotation spring mount.

5. The remaining portion of the wire harness to the righthand side lights must be routed through the frame.

Push a piece of stiff wire into the frame from the right side opening (1) and pull it out the left-hand side opening (2).

6. Attach the wiring harness to the wire and pull it through the frame.

7. Route the wiring harness through the existing hose clamp on the flotation spring mount.

8. Tighten the clamps on the front and rear of the tongue after taking up all slack and ensuring that a sufficient length of wiring harness is available to connect to the tractor.

48068916 04/11/2016

55.1 [55.404] / 7

Electrical systems - External lighting

9. Install the grommets into the hole (1) on top of each flotation spring mount.

10. Route the portion of the wiring harness that contains two connectors through the grommet.

11. Install a fiber washer over the stem of the amber light (2) and position it in the mount.

12. Install a flat washer, the white wire ring connector, a lock washer, and a nut onto the stem, and tighten securely.

13. Plug the blue wire on the amber light into the yellow harness wire on the left-hand side of the unit, or the green wire on the right-hand side of the unit.

86080769

3

86080769

4

14. Install the protective brackets (3) over the amber lights and secure to the mount using four 3/8 in x 1 in carriage bolts and flange nuts, as shown.

15. Install a fiber washer over the stem of the red light (1) and position it in the mount on the trail frame above the windrow shield pivots, with the red portion of the lamp facing rearwards.

16. Install a flat washer, the white wire ring connector, a lock washer, and a nut onto the stem, and tighten securely.

17. Plug the red wire from the light into the red wire on the wiring harness, and the black wire from the light into the brown wire on the wiring harness.

18. Repeat Steps 9 through 17 for the opposite side.

48068916 04/11/2016

55.1 [55.404] / 8

Electrical systems - External lighting

Connector socket

19987865N

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

5

Connector ID White (WHT) Black (BLK) Yellow (YEL) Red (RED) Green (GRN) Brown (BRN) Blue (BLU)

Attached To Ground wire, all lights Not Used Left-hand side amber light Brake lights Right-hand side amber light Tail lights Not used

Standard SAE J560 provides that the number four conductor (red wire) socket of the propelling vehicle is connected to the brake light circuit so that the brake lights activate when the brake pedal is depressed.

Most tractors are wired to provide the brake light signal through the number four pin in the connector socket. Some tractors may not provide this capability. On these tractors, the brake lights on trailing implements will not function, but the hazard lamps, the turn signals, and the tail lamps will function.

NOTE: On some tractors, the number four pin in the socket is utilized for other functions. Therefore, this circuit may be on all the time or any time the key switch is on. This will cause the trailing implement brake lights to be on all the time.

If you have one of these tractors, disconnect the bullet connector in the wiring harness where it attaches to the implement lighting control module (1) to disable the brake light circuit.

NOTE: You must reconnect the brake light circuit if you attach the implement to a propelling vehicle with a standard SAE J560 electrical socket.

NOTE: If you transport this machine on the highway, make sure that the propelling vehicle has the appropriate electrical socket so that the implement lights function.

30004615

48068916 04/11/2016

55.1 [55.404] / 9

6

Index Electrical systems - 55 External lighting - 404 External lighting - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Lighting control module - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

Turn signal and/or hazard lights - General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

Turn signal and/or hazard lights - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

48068916 04/11/2016

55.1 [55.404] / 10

48068916 04/11/2016

55.1 [55.404] / 11

CNH Industrial America New Holland Site 100 Brubaker Avenue New Holland, Pennsylvania United States 17557 SERVICE - Technical Publications & Tools

PRINTED IN U.S.A. Š 2016 CNH Industrial America LLC. All rights reserved. No part of the text or illustrations of this publication may be reproduced.

NEW HOLLAND policy is one of continuous improvement and the right to change prices, specification or equipment at any time without notices is reserved.

All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weight are approximate only and the illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your NEW HOLLAND Dealer.

48068916 04/11/2016 EN

SERVICE MANUAL Attachments/Headers H7230 H7330

48068916 04/11/2016

58

Contents Attachments/Headers - 58

[58.110] Attachment/Header cutting mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58.1 [58.130] Attachment/Header frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58.2

48068916 04/11/2016

58

Attachments/Headers - 58 Attachment/Header cutting mechanism - 110

H7230 H7330

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 1

Contents Attachments/Headers - 58 Attachment/Header cutting mechanism - 110

FUNCTIONAL DATA Disc cutterbar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

SERVICE Cutterbar drive Remove - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Disassemble - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Assemble - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Install - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Disc cutterbar Change fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Inspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Disc drive module - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Disc drive module - Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Disc drive module - Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Disc drive module - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Replace - Rock guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Cutter module skid shoe - Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Inspect - Knife and bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Knife blades - Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Inspect - Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Disc drive module - Remove - Shear hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Disc drive module - Install - Shear hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Replace - Bayonet bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

DIAGNOSTIC Attachment/Header cutting mechanism Troubleshooting for Roll Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Troubleshooting for Flail Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 2

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Overview The disc mower-conditioners use an 8-disc, counter-rotating disc cutterbar to provide a 3.1 m ( 10 ft 4 in) cutting width.

All eight discs are counter-rotating. The outer two discs are each equipped with an open feed drum to help feed crop into the conditioner rolls. The cutterbar is driven at one end through a drive shaft connected to the #1 disc (numbered from left-hand to right, as viewed from the rear).

20100100

1

The disc cutterbar is based on a true modular design.

Gearbox modules (1) are connected by independent, hardened alloy steel drive shafts (3) running through spacer modules (2) and the entire cutterbar is assembled using high strength tie bolts (4) to clamp the disc modules between the spacers. In the unlikely event of catastrophic failure, damage is contained to one module, which can be easily replaced without disturbing other modules.

2

A3663-08-300

Each disc module is a separate gear case with its own oil sump, and utilizes precision forged gears for strength.

Each module consists of a top cap assembly and a lower module assembly.

The top cap assembly consists of the top cap housing, a bevel gear shaft, a matched bearing set and a disc hub.

The top cap assembly can be removed from the module for servicing, without disassembling the cutterbar.

The lower module assembly consists of the lower module housing and the pinion shaft and bearing assembly.

Because the pinion shaft runs at 5400 RPM steel slingers are mounted at each end to splash oil on the shaft seals for lubrication and cooling.

The direction of rotation of the disc module is determined by the installation of the pinion shaft; if the pinion shaft is installed with the gear positioned on the right-hand side of the housing, the disc will rotate clockwise. Installing the pinion shaft with the gear to the left-hand will rotate the disc counterclockwise.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 3

36090989

3

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

If a problem is found with a specific module, the extent of the damage can be quickly determined by removing the disc and the top cap assembly of the affected module. If damage is limited to the top cap assembly components, the lower module can be flushed out to remove contaminants, and a new top cap assembly installed to complete the repair.

4

36090990

The cutterbar uses small diameter, high-profile discs (1) which are 4.7 mm (3/16 in) thick and hardened for long wear. The profile of the discs, combined with bolt on lifters (2) provide aggressive feeding to the conditioner rolls in difficult crop conditions on the conditioner roll units.

The flail unit does not require lifters on the discs because the flail conditioner lifts the crop up off the cutterbar and feeds the crop through the flail conditioner.

2-48

5

The discs (1) are equipped with 50.8 mm (2 in) wide knives (2) which are retained with 1/2 in bolts and hardened knife nuts. The knives are reversible for long life, and always have the beveled edge up. An arrow is stamped on both sides of the knife to show the direction of rotation.

Heat treated knife bolt protectors (3) serve as a wear surface to guard the bolt from deterioration, and can be rotated to extend life. The knives can be easily changed in any position on the cutterbar.

3996-14

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 4

6

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Each disc module is protected by a hardened ductile iron rock guard (1) and a skid shoe (2).

Skid shoes are 6.4 mm (1/4 in) thick and 203.2 mm (8 in) wide; they extend behind the module several inches for optimum flotation and extended wear life of the shoe.

19982131

7

19988038

8

20100146

9

All modular disc cutterbar components found in disc mower-conditioners, and disc headers share common parts, with two exceptions.

1. On units that have an odd number of discs and the need for discs to be spinning inwards, the #1 and #2 discs are co-rotating; they both spin in the same direction. This requires a slightly longer spacer and drive shaft between the #1 and #2 disc modules to eliminate interference between the knives on these discs.

2. On disc mower-conditioners that use a longer drive shaft between the end co-rotating discs of the cutterbar, a longer spacer (1) is used to mount the cutterbar to the header.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 5

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Cutterbar drive - Remove - Drive shaft 1. Remove the four bolts that secure the cutterbar drive shaft, the tower, and the disc to the disc hub at (1).

86080772

1

50033840

2

2. Lift the tower and drive shaft slightly to clear the disc hub bolt, and pull them forward so the upper end of the drive shaft slides off the splined shaft.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 6

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Cutterbar drive - Disassemble - Drive shaft 1. The drive shaft contains two universal joints, which may be serviced individually.

1431-6-6

1

1431-6-7

2

1431-6-8

3

2. The universal joint bearing cups are retained with external-type snap rings (1) positioned on the inner side of the yoke ears. Remove the snap rings by positioning a screwdriver against the open end of the snap ring, and give a light blow to the screwdriver to pop the snap ring off the bearing cup.

3. Remove the grease fitting (2) from the one bearing cup.

NOTE: The grease fitting is oriented to line up with other grease fittings on the drive shaft. Note the positioning of the grease fitting prior to removal.

4. Position the joint in an open vise, with each ear of one yoke supported by a vise jaw. With a soft hammer or mallet, strike the top ear of the unsupported yoke at (1).

This will drive the top bearing outward approximately 8 mm (1/4 in).

NOTICE: Do not use a hard faced hammer, as this may damage the edge of the bearing cup bore in the yoke, causing the bearing cup to hang up or seize in the yoke.

5. Pull the bearing out of the yoke ear. If necessary, grip the loosened bearing in a vise, and drive the yoke off the bearing by striking the yoke ear with the soft faced hammer or mallet.

6. This same procedure should be followed to remove the bearing directly opposite the one just removed, after which the yoke itself may be removed.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 7

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

7. To remove the remaining two bearings, support the cross in the vise, making certain the vise jaws are covered with brass protectors or the previously removed bearings are installed on the cross. By striking the yoke ear (1) the bearings can be removed as per Steps 4 and 5.

1431-6-9

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 8

4

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Cutterbar drive - Assemble - Drive shaft 1. To reassemble the universal joint, position the cross (1) in the yoke so that the bearing journals are positioned in each yoke ear. Insert the bearings in the outside of the yoke ears, and position the assembly in a vise. Press the bearings in until they are flush with the edge of the yoke.

2. Using a socket (2) of the same diameter as the bearing, press the bearing into the yoke ear until the snap ring groove is exposed on the inside of the yoke ear. Install the snap ring over the bearing cup.

3. Reposition the yoke and cross in the vise, and use the socket to press the opposite bearing fully into the yoke ear while rotating the cross to ensure it does not bind up. Continue to press the bearing into the yoke ear until the snap ring can be installed. It may be necessary to push the bearing in as far as possible with the vise, and then remove the yoke assembly and strike the yoke ears with a sharp blow from a hammer to spring the yoke enough to install the snap ring.

1431-6-10

1

1431-6-6

2

4. Assemble the second yoke to the cross, repeating Steps 1 through 3.

NOTE: The grease fitting (1) should be oriented to line up with the other grease fittings (2) on the drive shaft for ease of lubrication. Note the positioning of the bearing cup for the grease fitting during reassembly to ensure it aligns with the other grease fittings.

5. After complete assembly of the universal joint, strike the forged surfaces of all yoke ears with a sharp blow from a hammer. This will ensure proper seating of the bearings, and eliminate any possible tightness to ensure a free flexing joint.

NOTICE: Use caution not to strike the bearing bore area of the yoke, as this will damage the bore and may cause premature cross bearing failure.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 9

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Cutterbar drive - Install - Drive shaft 1. Slide the drive shaft onto the spline shaft of the gearbox. Lift the tower and drive shaft slightly to clear the disc hub bolt.

50033840

1

86080772

2

2. Secure the cutterbar drive shaft, the tower, and the disc to the disc hub at (1) with the four bolts from removal.

3. Torque the bolts to 113 N¡m (83 lb ft).

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 10

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Change fluid Park the header on a level surface.

1. Raise the header to the maximum height and engage the header lift locks.

2. Lock the header tilt cylinder in the minimum tilt position.

3. Position a pan or suitable container to catch the used oil underneath the module.

4. Remove the drain plug (1) on the bottom of the module.

5. Allow the module to drain completely.

6. Apply LOCTITEŽ 592™ PST to the threads and install the drain plug.

5000-09

1

1431-2-55N

2

7. Remove the dipstick (1) from the top of the module.

8. Add approximately 300 ml (10 US fl oz) of TUTELA HYPOIDE EP GEAR LUBE SAE 80W-90 or CNH HYPOIDE SSL SYNTHETIC GEAR LUBE 75W-90 to the module.

9. Install the dipstick back into the module, and then remove it to check the oil level.

10. When the oil level is correct, install the dipstick.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 11

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Inspect Inspection/failure analysis In the event of a failure of the modular disc cutterbar, it is important to properly inspect the unit to determine the extent of the damage. A thorough examination will help to locate all the damaged components, and minimize unnecessary repair labour. Often, it may not be necessary to remove and disassemble the cutterbar to repair or replace the failed components.

If a cutterbar failure is experienced, check the cutterbar components in the following sequence: 1. Inspect the external components for damage, paying particular attention to the knives (1), the lifters (roll machines only) (2), and the discs (3). Broken knives and bent or cracked discs and lifters are a result of contact with solid foreign objects, and may indicate possible internal damage. A disc out of time may also indicate internal damage; the discs are properly timed when they are positioned 90 ° to each other as shown.

Misalignment or gaps between the disc modules and spacers may indicate the tie bolts are loose or broken, or the dowel pins between the components have failed or are missing.

50011829NN

1

19982122

2

Roll machine

Flail machine

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 12

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

2. Carefully grab both ends of each disc, and try to “rock” the disc up and down. A small amount of movement, about 1.5 mm (0.060 in), is normal; an excessive amount of movement may be the result of a loose disc hub retaining bolt, or could indicate a worn top cap housing or bearings. Disc modules with excessive disc “rock” should have the disc retaining bolts and disc hub bolt checked for proper torque. Replace the disc hub retaining bolt if it has loosened; the bolt is equipped with a locking agent. If the bolts are tight, and movement still exists, the top cap assembly may need to be replaced.

1431-2-60N

3

19993799N

4

Roll machine

Flail machine

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 13

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

3. Starting at the left end of the cutterbar, grasp both the No. 1 and No. 2 discs, and slowly rotate both discs while applying pressure to one of the discs against the direction of rotation. If one disc suddenly moves, it may indicate damage to the gear teeth in that module. Excessive free play between discs, or if one disc may be turned freely without the other disc moving, may indicate excessive wear or failure of the inter module shaft.

Some rotational free play 4.7 mm (3/16 in) between adjacent discs is normal, as a result of the backlash in both gear sets.

1431-2-44N

5

19993801N

6

50022441N

7

Roll machine Check all disc modules by working gradually across the cutterbar, checking each disc to the next disc. In some cases, two adjacent modules may sustain damage from the same event, or there may be two separate failures on the cutterbar, involving modules in different locations.

Flail machine 4. After checking all disc modules (flail machine shown) for evidence of internal failure, remove the discs and top cap assemblies of any module with suspected damage. Inspect both the top cap assembly and the lower module assembly for bearing play or damage, and gear tooth damage. Grab the pinion shaft, and rotate the adjacent discs to check for play in the inter module shaft splines. The disc assembly includes a shear hub (1).

The shear hub will fail before other components in the disc drive, to protect those components and limit the failure to one part. To replace the shear hub follow the directions following this procedure.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 14

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

5. The cutterbar should only be removed from the machine (roll machine shown) and disassembled if it has been determined that the lower module components or the inter module shafts are damaged. Ensure that all disc modules were checked as per steps 2, 3, and 4 to determine which modules require removal for repair or replacement. Check the inter module shafts on both sides of a failed disc module for worn or twisted splines.

The cutterbar should also be removed and disassembled if misalignment or gaps between the modules and spacers was noted in step 1. Check the inter module shafts and pinions shafts for excessive spline wear at any connection where the tie bolts were found to be loose or failed, or where misalignment occurred due to missing or failed dowel pins. Note that dirt will tend to work its way inside spacers where the tie bolts are loose.

NOTE: Following all of the above listed steps when inspecting a failed cutterbar should ensure all components are checked, and any worn or failed components are identified prior to disassembly and repair of the cutterbar.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 15

50051124N

8

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Remove The cutter bar must be removed if a lower module assembly requires replacement or repair.

1. Raise the header and engage the transport locks. Install the pin (1) to lock the hydraulic header tilt cylinder in the 2 ° position.

86080770

1

3996-14

2

19986023

3

2. Block the cutterbar discs in place with a bar through the right-hand end tower to lock up the cutterbar, and remove the disc of the module to be removed by removing the four retaining bolts (1) securing the disc and cover to the disc hub.

3. Clean as much material buildup from around the disc hub and top cap assembly as possible. With the cutterbar blocking still in place, loosen the disc hub retaining bolt (1).

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 16

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

4. The tie bolts clamping the spacers to the disc modules are extremely tight, and are easier to loosen while the cutterbar is still clamped in the header frame. To gain access to the tie bolts, remove the rock guard and skid shoe from the module to be removed. Loosen the tie bolts by installing the holding tool FNH012212 (1) on one end of each tie bolt. Use wrench FNH012213 (2) with a 3/4 in breaker bar to loosen the tie bolts 1/2 turn total by turning the front and rear nuts alternating one flat at a time.

20052956

4

A3997-07

5

19984232

6

5. Place a floor jack under each end of the cutterbar as shown.

6. A special bolt (1) and nut (2) are used to retain the cutterbar.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 17

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

7. Remove the nuts (1) and slide the bolts out of the attaching arms.

NOTE: If the cutterbar mounting bolts do not drive out easily, slightly raise or lower the cutterbar using the floor jacks.

86080773

7

A3658-14

8

8. Lower the floor jacks and roll the cutterbar out from under the header.

NOTE: The drive shaft will slide off the bevel gearbox output shaft and stay with the cutterbar.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 18

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Install 1. Support the cutterbar with floor jacks positioned under each end.

2. Roll the cutterbar under the header, positioning the attaching arms so that they line up with the slots in the header frame.

3. Raise the cutterbar with the floor jacks until the top of the drive shaft is even with the gearbox output shaft.

A3997-07

1

A3658-18

2

A3658-13

3

4. Line up the drive shaft splines with the gearbox output shaft and raise the cutterbar upwards until the attaching arms line up with the header frame mounts.

5. Position the cutterbar so that the rear bolts holes (1) are lined up.

6. Raise or lower the front of the cutterbar as required to install the front bushings.

7. Install the cutterbar mounting bolt and nut. Torque the hardware to 271 N¡m (200 lb ft).

NOTE: There is a patch of locking compound in the nut.

If the nut is removed for any reason, a new nut should be installed.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 19

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar Disc drive module - Remove If not already removed, remove the disc, the rock guard, and the skid shoe from the module to be removed in order to gain access to the tie bolts (flail machine shown).

1. Loosen the tie bolts by installing the special tool FNH012212 (1) on one end of each tie bolt. Use the special tool FNH012213 (2) with a 3/4 inch breaker bar to loosen the front and rear nuts alternately, one flat at a time, until nuts can be turned freely by hand.

NOTICE: Do not loosen one nut completely as this will cause cutterbar to bow and may cause failure of the opposite tie bolt.

NOTE: If the tie bolts were not previously loosened with the cutterbar on the machine, it will be necessary to secure the cutterbar in some manner prior to attempting to loosen the tie bolts.

201001517

1

A3997-10

2

2. Slide the cutterbar apart far enough to allow removal of the disc module (flail machine shown) (1).

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 20

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar Disc drive module - Disassemble 1. Remove the disc hub by removing the center retaining bolt (1). It will be easier to remove the disc hub if the bolt is loosened prior to removing the module from the cutterbar. Clean off any material buildup on top of the module and the top cap assembly.

NOTE: Removing the disc hub will expose the upper bearing in the top cap assembly. Cover this area with a cloth, or use special tool FNH23ET95 to prevent contamination from entering the bearing.

A3663-3N

1

19985741N

2

A3655-2N

3

2. Remove the retaining bolts and pry the top cap assembly (1) off the lower module.

3. Pry the seals (1) from each side of the lower module, using caution not to damage the shaft surface.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 21

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

4. Use a pair of snap ring pliers to carefully remove the slingers (1) on each end of the lower module shaft.

NOTICE: Use caution to prevent the tips of the slingers from contacting the sealing surface on the end of the shaft, or seal failure will occur.

A3654-13

4

A3654-5N

5

5. Remove the snap rings from each side of the module.

6. Slide the lower module shaft, bearings and spacer washers out of the module housing. Note the orientation of the shaft in the housing prior to removing it, as this affects the direction of rotation of the disc module. If module has not been previously repaired, a compression shim washer will be on the lower module shaft instead of individual shims (1).

NOTE: If the lower module shaft is to be reused, use a nonmetallic abrasive pad to clean any dirt or corrosion from the sealing surfaces. Do not use emery cloth or steel wool as this will damage the sealing surface.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 22

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar Disc drive module - Assemble

201001519

(A) Clockwise rotation

1

(B) Counterclockwise rotation

Disc modules can be assembled for clockwise or counterclockwise rotation of the disc. Before assembling a disc module, you must be determine at which cutterbar location the disc module will be used to ensure it is assembled for proper rotation. When looking at a disc module from the rear, a counterclockwise module will have the pinion gear on the left side, and a clockwise module will have the pinion gear on the right side.

The direction of rotation of an assembled module can be determined by looking at the ends of the lower module shaft; the pinion end of the shaft has a shallow groove in the end to identify it.

The backlash of the assembled disc module is controlled by precision machining of the disc module and top cap housings, the use of precision forged gears, and the use of low tolerance bearings, which are manufactured to provide a specific "stack height," or combined thickness. The backlash in the gear set should be 0.13 - 0.28 mm (0.005 - 0.011 in) after the module has been assembled.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 23

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

If the backlash is found to be incorrect after gearbox repair with new parts, recheck the module for correct assembly of all components.

NOTE: Each bearing for the pinion shaft is manufactured for a specific "stack height". Do not mix old and new bearing components or substitute with "jobber" bearings.

1. Install a snap ring (1) on the pinion side of module casting. Slide the bearing cup for the pinion side bearing into the housing bore against snap ring. Note that the direction of rotation desired will affect which side of housing you start on. For example, install snap ring on right side of housing for clockwise rotation, and on the left side of housing for counter-clockwise rotation.

A3654-11

2

A3654-10N

3

2. Support the module housing approximately 1/2 in above the work surface on blocks, a large piece of pipe as shown, or in an open vise; position the snap ring and bearing cup down (1). Slide the assembled lower module shaft into housing, making sure pinion side is down against snap ring to orient properly for desired direction of rotation.

3. Install the bearing cup (2) that goes with the upper bearing cone into the housing. Place the two spacer washers (3) on top of the bearing cup, and install the snap ring (4) into the groove in the housing.

NOTE: The shims must be sandwiched between two hardened washers to protect them from bearing and snap ring groove.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 24

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

4. Check the end play of the pinion shaft with the pinion side facing down, to ensure an accurate measurement.

Rotate the shaft two complete revolutions to seat all components (bearing rollers in cage), and install a dial indicator to measure shaft end play. Allowable end play is 0.05 - 0.20 mm (0.002 - 0.008 in). Use a screwdriver to pry upwards on the pinion gear to obtain an end play reading. Remove the snap ring and add the required thickness of shims between the spacer washers to achieve the correct end play.

NOTE: The shims must be sandwiched between two hardened washers to protect them from the bearing and the snap ring groove.

A3654-16N

4

A3654-13

5

A3655-2-300

6

Check the end play again as described above to ensure the assembled end play is correct.

5. Install an oil slinger (1) into the groove on each end of the pinion shaft. Be careful not to scratch the sealing surface on the shaft as this will cause the shaft seal to leak, causing module failure. The slingers are bidirectional in nature, and may be installed in either direction on the shaft.

NOTICE: Use caution to prevent the tips of the slingers from contacting the sealing surface on the end of the shaft, or seal failure will occur.

6. Apply grease to the sealing lip on the shaft seal (1) and press them into place on each side of the housing.

NOTE: The seal must be pressed into place with a seal installing tool or suitable substitute. The seals must be flush with the side of the housing, and square to the shaft.

If the seal is driven in with a hammer, it will be distorted and leak, causing disc module failure.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 25

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

7. Apply LOCTITE® 592™ PST sealant to the threads of the drain plug and check plug, and install them into the housing. Pour 300 ml (10 US fl oz) of TUTELA HYPOIDE EP GEAR LUBE SAE 80W-90 through the top opening into the lower module.

A3655-1N

7

19985741N

8

8. Apply a thin bead of LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the sealing flange of the new top cap assembly, and position it on the lower module assembly with the breather facing to the right.

9. Apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the end of the threads of the top cap retaining bolts. Install and torque the bolts to 113 N·m (83 lb ft) Do not install the disc hub onto the top cap at this time, unless it is desired to check backlash. To check backlash, the disc hub must be installed and torqued to 224 N·m (150 lb ft) to seat bevel shaft against bearings and housing.

The acceptable backlash is 0.13 - 0.28 mm (0.005 0.011 in). If the backlash is unacceptable, check the assembly of the disc module.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 26

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar Disc drive module - Install 1. Prior to installation, remove the connecting shafts (1) from both spacers, and apply lubricant to both ends of the shafts. Install the connecting shafts (flail machine shown).

A3997-10

1

50051120N

2

19982156N

3

2. It is necessary to time the cutterbar discs on either side of the replacement module during reassembly to eliminate interference between the knives. The discs are properly timed when they are 90 ° apart, as shown. Rotate the discs of the modules on either side of the replacement module so that they are timed to each other.

Roll machine

Flail machine

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 27

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

3. Install the replacement module (1) on one end of the cutterbar so that the connecting shaft splines into the pinion shaft, the tie bolts are properly positioned and the module housing fits onto the aligning dowels on the spacer (flail machine shown).

A3997-11N

4

A3655-2N

5

19986023N

6

50051120N

7

It may be necessary to determine the direction of rotation of a replacement module prior to installing it in the cutterbar. Note that the pinion end of the lower module shaft has a groove (1) in it to determine which side of the module the pinion gear is on; this affects direction of rotation. If the groove (pinion) is on the right-hand side of assembled module, module will rotate clockwise, while a module with the groove (pinion) on the left-hand will rotate counterclockwise.

4. Slide the cutterbar together so that the other connecting shaft splines into the pinion shaft, and the spacer aligning dowels engage the holes in the disc module.

Ensure that the discs on either side of the replacement module remain timed to each other.

5. Install the nuts (1) onto the tie bolts and tighten finger tight, ensuring that the tie bolt threads protrude out of the nuts on both ends for full thread engagement in the nuts.

6. The replacement module must be timed to the rest of the cutterbar by properly positioning the disc hub on the top cap assembly. The discs are properly timed when they are 90 ° apart, as shown. The disc hub and top cap shaft splines are randomly cut, with no index marks.

Roll machine

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 28

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

19982156N

8

50022441N

9

Flail machine Slide the disc hub (1) onto the top cap shaft; if it is not perfectly timed to the adjacent discs, remove the disc hub, rotate it 90 ° and install it. Continue to do this until the disc hub is properly timed; one of the four positions will provide correct timing.

NOTE: With the adjacent discs positioned at 90 ° the breather (3) should be completely visible through the disc hub bolt hole (4) when the hub is properly timed.

After determining the correct position, apply a thin coating of grease to the seal lip and sealing surface on disc hub, and carefully slide disc hub onto shaft past seal.

Apply a small amount of silicone sealant to the end of the disc hub retaining bolt (2) and torque it to 183 N·m (135 lb ft)

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 29

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

7. The tie bolts which connect the cutterbar together are torqued using the degree method of torquing, which requires a special procedure. Install special tool FNH012212 (1) onto the nuts on one end of each tie bolt (flail machine shown). Then, using special tool FNH012213 (2) with a torque wrench, torque both tie bolts to 68 N¡m (50 lb ft).

NOTE: Always torque or turn the rear tie bolt first.

8. Use a marker or scribe to mark the front and rear nut positions relative to the spacer. Using special tool FNH012213 and a 3/4 in breaker bar, turn each nut 1/2 turn at a time to achieve one full turn on each tie bolt, starting with the rear tie bolt first. This will give a total torque on the tie bolt of 68 N¡m (50 lb ft) plus (1) turn, for a clamping force of 15876 - 16783 kg (35000 - 37000 lb) NOTE: It may be necessary to partially torque the tie bolts, mount the cutterbar assembly back onto the unit, and use a pipe or a bar to obtain enough leverage to complete tightening the tie bolts.

9. Remove the special tools from the cutterbar; it may be necessary to use a hammer to knock special tool FNH012212 off of the nuts.

10. Install the rock guard, skid shoe and disc on the replacement module.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 30

201001517

10

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Replace - Rock guards 1. Remove the rock guards (1) by removing the bolts (2).

NOTICE: Broken rock guards should be replaced immediately. Rock guards which are worn thin should be replaced before they break.

5000-11

1

19982131

2

Roll machine

Flail machine 2. Install the new rock guard (1) and torque the bolts (2) to 137 N¡m (101 lb ft).

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 31

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar Cutter module skid shoe - Replace 1. Skid shoes can be removed by removing the bolts (1).

2. Install the new skid shoe by inserting the forward edge up into the rock guard, and lift the rear up to align the bolt hole.

NOTE: It may be easier to install the skid shoe by first loosening the rock guard mounting bolts.

NOTICE: Broken skid shoes should be replaced immediately.

NOTICE: Skid shoes which are worn thin should be replaced before they break.

3. Install the bolt (1) and torque to 115 N¡m (85 lb ft).

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 32

NHIL13HT00512AA

1

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Inspect - Knife and bolt Inspect the cutterbar daily for damaged components.

The quality of cut and safety of operation depends on regular inspection of the cutterbar. Check the discs, knives, and hardware systematically for wear, damage or loose components. Operating over rough terrain and rocky conditions can cause the knives to crack or deform leading to cutting problems, increase of safety risks, and possible cutterbar damage.

NOTE: Striking an object can cause knife hardware to loosen. If an obstacle is struck, STOP, check all hardware and retighten.

50011829NN

1

19982122

2

Roll machine The knives must be replaced or turned over to a new cutting edge on a timely basis to maintain good cutting performance. Dull knives will require more horsepower to cut the crop and will leave a ragged stubble. Replace the knives if they are bent, severely worn, or if the hole is elongated. Replace the knife bolt if wear is found or if it can be threaded into the knife nut by hand. Replace the knife nut if the shoulder or threads show wear. Rotate the bolt protectors to a new area when changing knives and replace them if they are worn around the full circumference.

Flail machine NOTE: The knife bolts have a lock patch on them. If the knife nuts can be threaded into the knife nut by hand, replace the bolt.

When a knife or securing hardware is in question, replace it.

If the cutterbar cannot be turned by hand due to material build-up under the discs, start the tractor and operate the Power Take-Off (PTO) at 1/3 rated speed for 30 s.

Shut the tractor off and recheck. If the cutterbar still cannot be turned by hand, it will be necessary to remove the discs and clean out the material buildup.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 33

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar Knife blades - Replace NOTE: Inspect the cutterbar for leaks or other needed repairs whenever performing service work. If a leak is found, repair it immediately to prevent possible future failures.

NOTICE: Always replace both knives on a disc to maintain balance. Do not intermix old and new knives on a disc.

1. Remove the debris around the knife bolt (1) and bolt protector (flail machines only) (2) or crop lifter (roll machines only).

50011829NN

1

A3662-21N

2

Roll machine

Flail machine

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 34

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

2. Block the discs in place with a bar (1) through the right hand tower.

3. Remove the bolt with a socket, as shown.

19993800

3

20100100

4

A3662-24

5

1431-2-46N

6

4. The knife and the nut can be removed from under the disc after the bolt is removed.

5. Knives can be turned over to use the opposite cutting edge after they become dull or nicked. All knives are angled. Knives are referred to as clockwise or counterclockwise depending on which disc they are attached to.

6. The leading edge of the knives must be lower than the trailing edge. Refer to the accompanying drawing as to which way the discs turn.

7. Install the nut through the knife and insert the nut (1) into the bottom of the discs aligning it with the slot in the disc.

8. Install the knife bolt (1) and torque it to 159 N¡m (117 lb ft).

NOTE: After all knives are installed, turn the cutterbar by hand and check to be sure all knives are installed in the right direction and there is no interference.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 35

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Roll machine

19982124

Flail machine

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 36

7

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Inspect - Discs WARNING Moving parts!

Disengage the Power Take-Off (PTO), turn off the engine, and remove the key. Wait for all movement to stop before you leave the operator's position. Never adjust, lubricate, clean, or remove a blockage of crop material when the engine is on.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W0112B

1. Check the discs for damage and wear every time you replace the knives. If a disc is bent or cracked, replace the disc with a new part. When the leading edge (1) of the disc wears thin, the disc can be used on an opposite rotating module to utilize the second face.

NOTICE: Do not make weld repairs to the discs, as this will affect disc strength and balance.

2. Remove the discs by removing four bolts at (2).

3996-14

1

3658-23

2

3. Discs with towers can also be removed. On the righthand side, remove the four retaining bolts, and remove the tower and disc.

4. On the left-hand side, it will be necessary to remove the wear plates, if equipped, from the tower (1) to provide additional clearance. Remove the four retaining bolts, and slide the tower (1) and drive shaft (2) upwards and to the side in order to remove the disc.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 37

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

5. Install discs at right-hand angles to each other as shown. Position the end towers so that the notches in tower base align with the slots in the disc. Be sure the correct hardware is installed as follows: 1.

Discs with caps: • 1/2 in x 1 in bolts lock washers

2.

Right end disc tower: • 1/2 in x 1-1/4 in bolts thick hardened washers

3.

Left end disc, tower drive shaft: • 1/2 in x 1-3/4 in bolts thick hardened washers 4121-11

NOTICE: Use of incorrect disc retaining hardware may cause cutterbar lock-up and potential damage, or may prevent proper retention of discs.

6. Torque the retaining bolts to 113 N·m (83 lb ft).

NOTE: Do not over-tighten as bolts may yield.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 38

3

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar Disc drive module - Remove - Shear hub 1. Remove the bolts (1) from the disc.

2. Remove the disc (2) and the bolt cover (3).

2-48

1

56061901

2

50022441

3

3. For non-driven discs that have a drum, remove the plate (1) from the drum (2). Remove the four retaining bolts (3) and remove the drum (2) and the disc.

NOTE: PTO-driven discs with drums do not use shock hubs.

4. Remove the 12-point bolt (1), the hardened washer (2), and the conical washer (3).

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 39

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

5. Remove the splined washer (1)and the shock hub (2) together from the disc module.

NOTE: DO NOT remove the seal hub unless it is damaged.

Replace if damaged.

6. Clean the metal spline fragments from the gear shaft.

7. Wipe the entire area clean of metal fines.

NOTICE: Metal fragments and fines must be cleaned off the top of the seal hub to get even clamping on mating surfaces. Uneven clamping could crack the seal hub.

NOTE: Check the gear shaft for excessive play. If the bearing feels loose, complete a full cutterbar inspection.

56064436

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 40

4

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar Disc drive module - Install - Shear hub 1. Install the new shock hub (5) on the disc module (7).

2. Install the splined washer (4).

NOTE: Inspect the splined washer. If it is damaged, replace it with a new part.

3. Time the shock hub with the rest of the cutterbar such that the discs will be 90 ° apart.

NOTE: When installing the conical washer, make sure that you have the cupped side facing down.

4. Install the new top cap center bolt (1), the new conical washer (2), and the new hardened washer (3).

5. Torque the bolt to 183 N·m (135 lb ft).

NOTICE: DO NOT over-torque or under-torque top center bolt. Bearing life may be compromised if this bolt is overtorqued.

56064433N

1

2-48

2

6. Install the disc (1) and the bolt cover (2) with the retaining bolts (3).

7. Torque the retaining bolts to 115 N·m (85 lb ft).

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 41

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Disc cutterbar - Replace - Bayonet bushing 1. To replace the cutterbar bayonet bushings, remove the cutterbar (1) from the machine.

A4831-16N

1

19991333

2

2. Remove the snap ring (1) from the bayonet arm.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 42

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

3. Using a hammer and punch, evenly drive the bushing out of the bayonet arm by striking the outer race (1) of the bushing. Drive the bushing out slowly to prevent damaging the bayonet arm.

NOTE: Do not drive against the inner ball of the bushing to remove it or the bayonet arm will fracture and break.

19991334

3

19991333

4

4. Install the new bushing into the bayonet arm by driving against the outer race of the bushing. Drive the bushing in slowly, ensuring that it does not cock sideways in the bayonet arm.

5. Install the snap ring (1) to retain the bushing.

6. Install the cutterbar onto the machine.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 43

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Attachment/Header cutting mechanism - Troubleshooting for Roll Units Problem Leaves damaged or stripped off stems.

Leaving ragged or long stubble.

Possible Cause Too much pressure on the rolls.

Ground speed too fast.

Dull, bent, or broken knives.

Knives installed on wrong discs.

PTO speed too slow.

Correction Reduce the pressure until the leaves are not damaged.

Reduce the ground speed.

Turn over or replace the knives.

Install knives on correct discs.

Maintain RPM on the tractor PTO. (Do not overspeed.)

Cutting too high.

Remove high stubble kit, if installed. Increase header tilt.

Header flotation too light.

Adjust flotation springs to increase header flotation weight.

Raise the cutting height with header tilt. InExcessive breakage of the Cutting too low in stony conditions. stall high stubble kit. knives.

Header flotation too heavy for stony fields. Adjust the flotation springs to float the header with 45 kg (100 lb) force, per side.

Ground speed too high in stony conditions. Reduce ground speed.

Not cutting short enough Ground speed too fast.

Reduce ground speed. in down material.

Broken, bent, or dull knives.

Replace the knives or turn over the knives.

Lower the cutting height by tilting the Cutting height too high. header.

Tractor PTO speed too slow.

Maintain tractor PTO RPM. (Do not overspeed.)

Use slower ground speed.

Strip of run-down, uncut Ground speed too fast. material.

Do not crowd the uncut material.

Crowding of the uncut material.

Missing or dull knives.

Replace or turn over the knives.

Material buildup on cutter bar.

Clean off cutter bar. Tilt cutter bar back towards horizontal to reduce material buildup.

Forming poor or bunchy Tractor PTO speed too slow.

Maintain RPM on the tractor PTO. (Do not windrow overspeed.)

Incorrect swath gate adjustment.

Adjust the swath gate to even discharge flow.

Incorrect windrow shield adjustment.

Adjust the windrow shields.

Pulling material out Excessive roll pressure.

Reduce roll pressure or increase roll clearof the ground when ance. cutting back swath or tall material is leaning into the machine. Excessive power requirements.

Ground speed too slow.

Use faster ground speed.

Material being discharged Cutter bar not taking a full cut; #1 disc not Shift unit right into standing crop to take full out of the left side of the running in standing crop. cut. machine.

Inner left side curtain worn or damaged.

Replace inner left side curtain.

Very wet crop conditions.

Soil buildup on front of Adjust flotation springs to reduce header cutter bar. flotation weight.

Raise the cutting height with header tilt.

Install high stubble kit.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 44

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Attachment/Header cutting mechanism - Troubleshooting for Flail Units Problem Leaves damaged or stripped off stems.

Crop stems not scuffed.

Possible Cause Over conditioning.

Leaving ragged or long stubble.

Ground speed too fast.

Under conditioning.

Dull, bent, or broken knives.

Knives installed on wrong discs.

PTO speed too slow.

Correction Raise rotor hood.

Slow speed rotor.

Smooth liner.

Lower rotor hood or install dimpled hood liner and high speed rotor.

Reduce the ground speed.

Turn over or replace the knives.

Install knives on correct discs.

Maintain RPM on the tractor PTO. (Do not overspeed.)

Cutting too high.

Remove high stubble kit, if installed. Increase header tilt.

Header flotation too light.

Adjust flotation springs to increase header flotation weight to reduce header bouncing on uneven ground.

Raise the cutting height with header tilt. InExcessive breakage of the Cutting too low in stony conditions. stall high stubble kit. knives.

Header flotation too heavy for stony fields. Adjust the flotation springs to float the header with 45.4 kg (100 lb) force, per side.

Ground speed too high in stony conditions. Reduce ground speed.

Not cutting short enough Ground speed too fast.

Reduce ground speed. in down material.

Broken, bent, or dull knives.

Replace the knives or turn over the knives.

Lower the cutting height by tilting the Cutting height too high. header.

Tractor PTO speed too slow.

Maintain tractor PTO RPM. (Do not overspeed.)

Remove top cap and inspect for damage.

Discs out of time or jump Impact with rock.

Replace top cap assembly if necessary. time occasionally.

Use slower ground speed.

Strip of run-down, uncut Ground speed too fast. material.

Do not crowd the uncut material.

Crowding of the uncut material.

Missing or dull knives.

Replace or turn over the knives.

Material buildup on cutter bar.

Clean off cutter bar. Tilt cutter bar back towards horizontal to reduce material buildup.

Forming poor or bunchy Tractor PTO speed too slow.

Maintain RPM on the tractor PTO. (Do not windrow. overspeed.)

Incorrect swath gate adjustment.

Adjust the swath gate to even discharge flow.

Incorrect windrow shield adjustment.

Adjust the windrow shields.

Pulling material out Ground speed too slow.

Use faster ground speed. of the ground when cutting back swath or tall material is leaning into the machine. Excessive power requirements.

Material being discharged Cutter bar not taking a full cut; #1 disc not Shift unit right into standing crop to take full out of the left side of the running in standing crop. cut. machine.

Inner left side curtain worn or damaged.

Replace inner left side curtain.

Soil buildup on front of Very wet crop/soil conditions.

Adjust flotation springs to reduce header cutter bar. flotation weight.

Raise the cutting height with header tilt.

Install high stubble kit.

Impact with rock.

Loose knife hardware.

Inspect for damage, retighten hardware.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 45

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header cutting mechanism

Problem Cutter bar does not turn easily by hand.

Module oil level low.

Possible Cause Buildup of dirt or twine under discs.

Top cap seal failure from melted twine.

Seal failure on input shaft.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 46

Correction Remove disc and disc hub if necessary to clear debris.

Remove twine and replace top cap seal.

Replace seal.

Index Attachments/Headers - 58 Attachment/Header cutting mechanism - 110 Attachment/Header cutting mechanism - Troubleshooting for Flail Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

45

Attachment/Header cutting mechanism - Troubleshooting for Roll Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

44

Cutterbar drive - Assemble - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

Cutterbar drive - Disassemble - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

Cutterbar drive - Install - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

Cutterbar drive - Remove - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

Disc cutterbar - Change fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

Disc cutterbar - Inspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12

Disc cutterbar - Inspect - Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37

Disc cutterbar - Inspect - Knife and bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

33

Disc cutterbar - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19

Disc cutterbar - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Disc cutterbar - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16

Disc cutterbar - Replace - Bayonet bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

42

Disc cutterbar - Replace - Rock guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31

Disc cutterbar Cutter module skid shoe - Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32

Disc cutterbar Disc drive module - Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23

Disc cutterbar Disc drive module - Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21

Disc cutterbar Disc drive module - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27

Disc cutterbar Disc drive module - Install - Shear hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

41

Disc cutterbar Disc drive module - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20

Disc cutterbar Disc drive module - Remove - Shear hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

39

Disc cutterbar Knife blades - Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

34

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 47

48068916 04/11/2016

58.1 [58.110] / 48

Attachments/Headers - 58 Attachment/Header frame - 130

H7230 H7330

48068916 04/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 1

Contents Attachments/Headers - 58 Attachment/Header frame - 130

TECHNICAL DATA Flotation system Special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

FUNCTIONAL DATA Flotation system Overview - Cutterbar flotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

SERVICE Flotation system Tension adjust - flotation springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Remove flotation springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Disassemble flotation springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Assemble flotation springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Install flotation springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Crop lifter Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

48068916 04/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 2

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

Flotation system - Special tools Separation of the spring nuts from the springs requires a special tool for each size spring. Flail machines and roll machines use two different sizes of flotation springs. Use the specifications provided to manufacture the proper tools for your machine using common metal pipe stock.

19992639NN

(A) 3-7/8 in ID (B) 1/2 in key stock

1

(C) 3 in ID (D) 40 in (approx)

Parts List: Floatation Spring Wrench Qty. 1 1 2 2

Part Metal pipe, minimum 4 in long with inside diameter of 3-7/8 in Metal pipe, minimum 4 in long with inside diameter of 3 in Metal pipe or bar stock, 40 in x 1-1/8 in 1/2 in key stock

Instructions 1. Weld a metal key on the inside of one end of each 4 in length of pipe.

2. Weld a 40 in length of pipe or bar stock onto each 4 in pipe as shown to form a handle.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 3

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

Flotation system - Overview - Cutterbar flotation The cutterbar flotation is controlled by flotation springs (1) at each end of the header.

Adjust the cutterbar flotation for about 45 - 55 kg (100 120 lb) at each end of the header, if operating in rocky fields at lower 5 - 8 km/h (3 - 5 mph) ground speeds. If the machine is to be operated in relatively smooth fields at higher 8 - 11 km/h (5 - 7 mph) ground speeds, it may be necessary to adjust the flotation to obtain 59 - 68 kg (130 - 150 lb) at each end of the header to prevent excessive header bounce.

NOTE: Do not exceed 68 kg (150 lb) flotation force, or header damage may result 19991342N

1

19982144N

2

Turn the adjusting bolts (2) as required. Check flotation with the header swung fully to the right, lowered to the ground, and tilted as desired.

NOTE: The cutterbar flotation must be checked and adjusted when using tractors with different drawbar heights, or when installing or removing the high stubble kit.

Raise the cutterbar center shield and lift on the left and right end supports (1) and (2). Operating with heavier than necessary weight results in side draft and excessive wear to cutterbar components. If the header is too light, long stubble results when the header does not quickly return to ground level after crossing a bump.

NOTE: Check flotation frequently, because crop and dirt buildup can cause the flotation weights to change.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 4

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

Flotation system - Tension adjust - flotation springs WARNING Disengage the PTO, turn off the tractor engine and remove the key. Wait for all movement to stop before leaving the operator's position. Never adjust, lubricate, clean or unplug the machine with the tractor engine running. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

M1208

1. The cutter bar flotation is controlled by flotation springs (1) at each end of the header.

2. Adjust the cutter bar flotation for about 45.5 - 54.5 kg (100 - 120 lb) at each end of the header for normal cutting conditions.

3. To cut at higher ground speeds, 8 - 11 km/h (5 - 7 mph) on smooth fields, increase flotation to 59 - 68 kg (130 150 lb). Tighten the adjusting bolts at the top of the flotation springs and check flotation with the header swung fully to the right, lowered to the ground, and tilted to the desired angle.

86080759

1

86080776

2

A3658-2A

3

NOTE: Check and adjust the cutter bar flotation when switching to tractors with different drawbar heights, or when installing or removing the high stubble kit.

4. Raise the cutter bar center shield and lift on the left and right end supports, (1) and (2). Operating with heavier than necessary weight causes side draft and excessive wear to the cutter bar components. Using too little weight causes the header to leave long stubble because the header does not quickly return to ground level after crossing a bump.

NOTE: Check flotation frequently. Crop and dirt buildup can cause the flotation weights to change.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 5

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

Flotation system - Remove flotation springs WARNING Entanglement hazard! Never adjust, lubricate, clean or unplug machine with the engine running. Disengage drives, turn off engine and remove the key. Wait for all movement to stop before leaving the operator’s position. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

M1610

1. Loosen the locknut (1) from the spring nut. Turn the locknut away from the spring to allow the long adjusting bolt to move freely in the spring nut.

19992629

1

19992630

2

2. Back out the adjusting bolt until it separates from the spring nut and spring.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 6

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

3. Remove the cotter pin (1) at the bottom hub.

NOTE: This figure shows the flail units cotter pin. Figure 4 shows the conditioner roll units cotter pin.

19992631

3

19992632

4

19992633

5

4. Remove the spacer, bushing and spring assembly from the hub. The spring assembly is now free of the machine (Flail unit shown).

NOTE: The bottom anchors vary slightly between the Roll Unit and Flail Unit, and the spacer/bushing combinations may vary from side to side. Always reinstall the parts in the same configuration as prior to removal.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 7

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

Flotation system - Disassemble flotation springs 1. Clamp the spring assembly firmly in a vise.

2. Slide the flotation spring wrench onto the spring (1) with the metal nib facing out. Use the metal nib to catch the end of the spring coil, and rotate the tool clockwise.

This expands the spring diameter.

CAUTION Spring is under pressure. Stay clear and use the proper tool to rotate the spring coil. Failure to comply may result in minor or moderate injury M1363

19992636

1

19992637

2

3. While holding the spring open with the flotation spring wrench, use a large wrench to screw the spring nut out of the spring (2).

NOTE: Spray the ends of the spring around with spring nuts with penetrating oil to ease disassembly.

4. Reverse the spring in the vise and repeat the process with the other end.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 8

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

Flotation system - Assemble flotation springs 1. Clamp the spring firmly in a vise.

2. Clean the spring nuts thoroughly with emery cloth to remove rust and rough areas. Apply lubricant, such as light oil, to the spring nuts to ease assembly.

3. Use a large wrench to screw the spring nuts into each end of the spring. Install the spring nuts so they are fully into the coil but not recessed.

NOTE: The flotation spring wrench is needed for assembly.

The installation process turns the spring nuts clockwise, pushing the spring coils open without any special tools.

NOTE: The assembled springs may be more difficult to install on the machine if the spring nuts are installed too far into the coils.

CAUTION Spring nuts must be properly installed or nuts could slip out of the spring. Screw the spring nuts into the spring coil until all the grooves are covered. Failure to comply may result in minor to moderate injury or damage to the machine.

M1364

48068916 04/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 9

19992638

1

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

Flotation system - Install flotation springs 1. Place the bushing, spring assembly and spacer on the lower hub (1).

NOTE: This figure shows the Flail Unit assembly. The conditioner roll unit features a removable anchor pin.

19992634

1

19992631

2

19992632

3

2. Install the cotter pin (2). (This figure shows the flail unit.

Figure 3 shows the conditioner roll unit.)

48068916 04/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 10

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

3. Slide the long adjusting bolt through the washer (1) and pivot (2) and insert it through the anchor plate on the frame. Thread the adjusting bolt into the top of the spring assembly (3).

4. Tighten the adjusting bolt to the desired flotation (see Flotation system - Tension adjust - flotation springs (58.130)).

19992635

4

19992629

5

5. Tighten the locknut against the spring nut on the adjusting bolt.

48068916 04/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 11

Attachments/Headers - Attachment/Header frame

Crop lifter - Replace NOTICE: Replace both crop lifters on a disc to maintain balance. Do not make weld repairs to the crop lifters, as this will affect crop lifter strength and balance.

The crop lifters should be inspected daily for wear or damage. Replace the crop lifters (1) when the sloping surfaces wear thin or wear through, or if the crop lifter is bent or cracked.

1. Replace the crop lifter (1) by removing the knife bolt (2) and the crop lifter bolt (3). It will be necessary to slide a wrench under the disc to hold the flange nut on the crop lifter bolt.

2. Install the new crop lifter. (1) Torque the bolts (2) and (3) to 159 N¡m (117 lb ft).

4896-10

48068916 04/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 12

1

Index Attachments/Headers - 58 Attachment/Header frame - 130 Crop lifter - Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12

Flotation system - Assemble flotation springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

Flotation system - Disassemble flotation springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

Flotation system - Install flotation springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

Flotation system - Overview - Cutterbar flotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

Flotation system - Remove flotation springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

Flotation system - Special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Flotation system - Tension adjust - flotation springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

48068916 04/11/2016

58.2 [58.130] / 13

CNH Industrial America New Holland Site 100 Brubaker Avenue New Holland, Pennsylvania United States 17557 SERVICE - Technical Publications & Tools

PRINTED IN U.S.A. Š 2016 CNH Industrial America LLC. All rights reserved. No part of the text or illustrations of this publication may be reproduced.

NEW HOLLAND policy is one of continuous improvement and the right to change prices, specification or equipment at any time without notices is reserved.

All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weight are approximate only and the illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your NEW HOLLAND Dealer.

48068916 04/11/2016 EN

SERVICE MANUAL Product feeding H7230 H7330

48068916 04/11/2016

60

Contents Product feeding - 60

[60.120] Header drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60.1 [60.620] Roll conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60.2 [60.630] Flail conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60.3

48068916 04/11/2016

60

Product feeding - 60 Header drive system - 120

H7230 H7330

48068916 04/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 1

Contents Product feeding - 60 Header drive system - 120

SERVICE Header drive belt Replace - Roll conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Tension adjust - Roll conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Replace - Flail conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Tension adjust - Flail conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Bevel gearbox Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

48068916 04/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 2

Product feeding - Header drive system

Header drive belt - Replace - Roll conditioner 1. To remove the conditioner roll drive belt, remove the tension on the belt by loosening the nuts (1) on the spring tension rod until the belt can be removed from the upper sheave.

A3994-9N

1

A3659-25N

2

1411-13

3

2. It will be necessary to remove the 1/2 in x 1-1/4 in bolt and locknut at (1) and pry the divider sheet away from the conditioner roll gearbox. The belt can now be removed from the sheaves and slid forward between the divider sheet and the gearbox, as shown in Figure 3.

3. Install the new belt by sliding it between the divider sheet and the conditioner roll gearbox, and position it onto the sheaves. Tighten the nuts on the spring tension rod to tension spring to a length (A), Figure 1, of 279 mm +/- 5 (10.98 in +/- 0.20), measured inside hook-to-hook.

4. Install the bolt and locknut to retain the divider sheet.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 3

Product feeding - Header drive system

Header drive belt - Tension adjust - Roll conditioner To adjust the conditioner belt, loosen the jam nut (1) from the adjusting nut (2).

10045453

1

A3994-9

2

Tighten the spring (1) tension rod nut (2) until the length between the two points (3) are at specification. The spring length should be 279 mm +/- 5 (10.98 in +/0.20).

NOTE: The spring length is measured inside hook-to-inside hook.

After you achieve the correct length, lock the nut jam nut to the adjusting nut (2).

48068916 04/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 4

Product feeding - Header drive system

Header drive belt - Replace - Flail conditioner 1. To remove the conditioner drive belt (1), remove the tension on the belt by loosening the nuts (2) on the spring tension rod until the belt can be removed from the upper sheave.

19982126B

1

19982116

2

1411-13

3

2. Remove the 1/2 in x 1-1/4 in bolt and locknut at (1) and pry the divider sheet away from the header frame. The belt can now be removed from the sheaves and slid forward between the divider sheet and the gearbox, as shown in Figure 3.

3. Install the new belt by sliding it between the divider sheet and header frame, and position it onto the sheaves.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 5

Product feeding - Header drive system

4. Tighten the nuts on the spring tension rod to tension spring to a length (A), Figure 2, of 254 mm +/- 5 (10 in +/- 0.20), measured inside hook-to-hook.

5. Install the 1/2 in x 1-1/4 in bolt and locknut to retain the divider sheet.

19982126A

48068916 04/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 6

4

Product feeding - Header drive system

Header drive belt - Tension adjust - Flail conditioner 1. The conditioner belt must be properly tensioned at all times to prevent excessive slipping. A loose belt may cause conditioner to wrap or plug.

NOTE: Check the belt tension each day for the first few days. Check weekly thereafter.

19982151

1

19982126A

2

2. Tighten the spring (1) tension adjusting nuts (2) until the length between the two points (A) are at specification.

The spring length should be 254 mm +/- 5 (10 in +/0.20).

NOTE: The spring length is measured inside hook-to-inside hook.

3. After you achieve the correct spring length, lock the adjusting nuts (2) against the bracket.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 7

Product feeding - Header drive system

Bevel gearbox - Remove WARNING Avoid injury! Always do the following before lubricating, maintaining, or servicing the machine.

1. Disengage all drives.

2. Engage parking brake.

3. Lower all attachments to the ground, or raise and engage all safety locks.

4. Shut off engine.

5. Remove key from key switch.

6. Wait for all machine movement to stop.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

W1299A

1. Raise the header and engage the transport locks prior to removal of the bevel gearbox.

2. Drain the oil from the bevel gearbox while it is still on the machine. To drain the oil, remove the drain plug at (1).

NOTE: The oil may drain faster if the fill plug is also removed.

86080772

1

86080768

2

50012123

3

3. Open the left-hand side shield by unhooking the rubber straps, lifting shield and swinging it open.

NOTE: It may be more convenient to remove the left-hand end shield for better access. To remove the shield, remove the two bolts and locknuts at (1) and lift off the shield.

4. Remove the two clamping bolts (1) and locknuts from the rear of the slip clutch assembly. Loosen the bolt (2) and lock washer inside the slip clutch yoke, but do not remove it. Tap the rear of the clutch housing with a soft faced hammer to remove it from the taper on the gearbox shaft; the center retaining bolt will prevent the clutch from falling off the shaft.

5. Remove the center retaining bolt (2) and slide the clutch assembly off of the gearbox input shaft.

NOTICE: The slip clutch end of the secondary Power TakeOff (PTO) shaft is very heavy and awkward; use caution not to drop the shaft assembly as personal injury or damage to the Constant Velocity (CV) joint may result.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 8

Product feeding - Header drive system

6. Remove the upper shielding by removing four carriage bolts, flat washers, and flange nuts at (1) and four carriage bolts, flat washers, and flange nuts at (2). It may be necessary to loosen two or three bolts between the lower shield and the header frame if the shield is sandwiched between these components.

7. If the conditioner drive shaft assembly (3) requires repair, it should be partially disassembled before the bevel gearbox is removed from the machine as the sheave retaining bolt may be removed easier.

1411_6_13

4

3996-4

5

3659-19

6

8. Block the cutterbar discs in place with a bar (1) through the right-hand hand tower (2).

9. Remove the bolt (1) and the flat washer from the end of the conditioner roll drive sheave.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 9

Product feeding - Header drive system

10. Remove the tension on the conditioner roll drive belt by loosening the nuts (2) on the spring tension rod until the belt can be removed from the upper sheave.

Remove the spring (1) from the idler arm.

A3994-9

7

86080772

8

11. Remove the five bolts (1) and flat washers that retain the gearbox to the header frame.

12. Lift the gearbox upwards until the gearbox output shaft slips out of the cutterbar drive shaft yoke, and remove the gearbox from the machine.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 10

Product feeding - Header drive system

Bevel gearbox - Disassemble 1. Remove the belt idler pulley by removing the cotter pin (1) and washers; slide the pivot shaft out of the mount.

2. To disassemble the conditioner drive shaft assembly, the drive pulley must be removed. Remove the bolt (2) and the flat washer, if it is not already removed. Use a puller to remove the sheave (3) from the shaft.

1411_6_1

1

1411_6_2

2

1411_6_3

3

3. After removing the sheave, remove the key (1), the washers (2), and the spacer (3).

4. Remove the six bolts (4), Figure 1 and lock washers retaining the belt drive pulley and shaft assembly to the gearbox housing. Pry the assembly off of the gearbox housing.

5. Remove the gearbox cover plate by removing ten bolts and lock washers; pry the cover plate off.

6. Remove the front and rear bearing caps by removing four bolts and lock washers and prying the caps off.

Use caution not to damage the shims located under the front bearing cap.

7. Remove the input shaft assembly (1) by sliding it forward, and lifting it up out of the top of the gearbox housing.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 11

Product feeding - Header drive system

8. Tip the gearbox over, and remove the four bolts (1) and lock washers retaining the anti-wrap shield and bearing cap on the output shaft. Remove the anti-wrap shield, and pry off the bearing cap, being careful not to damage the shims. Remove the output shaft by pulling it out of the gearbox housing.

1411_6_11R

4

1411_6_5

5

1411_6_6

6

9. Disassemble the input shaft by positioning it in a press, and push the shaft out of the gear and bearing. The gear is mounted on a straight spline on the shaft. After removing the gear and bearing on one side, flip the shaft over, and press off the opposite gear and bearing.

10. Use a split bearing puller to capture the bearings on the output shaft, and press them off.

11. Remove the cotter pin, the castellated nut (1), and the flat washer from the conditioner drive shaft assembly; slide the gear (2) off of the shaft.

12. Install the castellated nut onto the shaft backwards, and position the assembly in a press. Press the shaft out of bearing and housing.

NOTE: The shaft seal (3) will be damaged when the shaft is pressed out, and must be replaced.

13. Use a split bearing puller to remove the remaining bearing on the conditioner drive shaft.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 12

Product feeding - Header drive system

Bevel gearbox - Assemble

20100151

1

Cutaway of the bevel gearbox

48068916 04/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 13

Product feeding - Header drive system

NOTE: During assembly of the bevel gearbox, it is important to be aware that all bearings, except for the bottom bearing (1), Figure 1, on the cutterbar drive shaft, consists of precision-manufactured cups and cones to provide a specific 'stack height,' or combined thickness. These low tolerance bearings, in conjunction with precision machining of the gearbox housings and the use of precision forged gears, have eliminated the need for backlash adjustments during the repair of the gearbox. The backlash between the gearsets (2), Figure 1, should be 0.127 - 0.381 mm (0.005 - 0.015 in) after the gearbox has been assembled.

NOTE: If the backlash is found to be incorrect after the gearbox repair with new parts, recheck the gearbox for correct assembly of all components.

NOTE: The low tolerance bearings are manufactured for a specific 'stack height'. Do not mix old and new bearing components or substitute with 'jobber' bearings.

1. Install new bearing cups into the conditioner drive housing.

NOTE: Do not mix old and new bearing components; always replace both cups and cones.

2. Pack a new bearing cone with grease, and press it onto the conditioner drive shaft.

NOTE: The outer bearing cone (3), Figure 1, on the conditioner drive shaft must be packed with grease to ensure it is lubricated during startup, as oil must flow through the inner bearing to get to the outer bearing. Lubricate all other bearing cones with oil during assembly to ensure accurate rolling torque measurements.

3. Insert the shaft assembly through the conditioner drive housing, and slide on a new bearing cone and 24T gear; oil bearing cone prior to installation. Press the gear and bearing on until the bearing is almost seated.

1411_6_7

2

1411_6_8

3

1411_6_16

4

4. Install the flat washer and castellated nut onto the shaft, and tighten the castellated nut as required to obtain 0.23 - 0.68 N¡m (2 - 6 lb in) rolling torque on the conditioner drive shaft assembly.

5. After adjusting the rolling torque, tighten or loosen the nut as required in order to align it with the hole in the shaft. If the nut must be rotated more than one quarter of a flat to align it with the hole, loosen off the nut, strike the shaft with a soft-faced hammer to unseat the bearing cone, and repeat the process. Recheck the rolling torque prior to installing the cotter pin to ensure it is correct.

NOTICE: Do not exceed 0.68 N¡m (6 lb in) rolling torque on the conditioner drive shaft assembly, or bearing failure could occur.

6. Lubricate the shaft seal lips liberally with grease, and install the seal over the shaft and onto the shoulder.

Seat the seal (1) into the housing (2) until it is flush with the outer face of the housing.

NOTE: The seal lip will engage on the shaft shoulder at the same time the seal cage must be installed in the housing bore; use caution to ensure the seal lip does not roll outwards.

NOTE: Figure shows conditioner drive shaft assembly installed on gearbox. Do not install assembly until after input shaft rolling torque is adjusted.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 14

Product feeding - Header drive system

7. Install the spacer (1) with the bevel facing in towards the shoulder on the shaft. Slide on the washers (2) install the key in the keyway so that the end is flush with the end of the shaft, slide on the sheave, and install the bolt and flat washer.

NOTE: It will be easier to torque the sheave retaining bolt after installing the bevel gearbox back onto the unit.

1411_6_2

5

1411_6_9

6

1411_6_4

7

8. Install a 24T gear onto the front of the input shaft, and press a bearing cone onto shaft until it seats against shoulder on shaft. Install the 54T gear onto the end of the shaft and press a bearing cone onto shaft until the gear seats against the collar on the shaft. Press bearing cones onto the output shaft.

9. Install new bearing cups into the input shaft bearing caps and gearbox housing. Do not install shaft seals into the input and output shaft bearing caps at this time.

10. Apply oil to the output shaft bearing cones, and position the output shaft assembly into the gearbox housing; install a new bearing cup to retain shaft. Install the bearing cap (1) and the original shim pack using four bolts and lock washers. If the original shim pack is destroyed, or if all new parts are being used, use a starting shim pack thickness of 0.38 mm (0.015 in).

Check and adjust the output shaft rolling torque to 0.23 - 0.68 N¡m (2 - 6 lb in) by shimming under the bearing cap as required. If the output shaft rolling torque is initially too tight, tap the shaft downwards to remove the preload on the bearings before installing the bearing cap and revised shim pack.

NOTE: The output shaft rolling torque can be checked by selecting a socket which fits over the shaft, and lock it to the shaft by sliding a hex key wrench between the shaft spline and socket. Attach an inch-pound torque wrench to socket.

NOTE: Do not install the shaft seal or anti-wrap shield on the bearing cap prior to checking and adjusting the rolling torque.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 15

Product feeding - Header drive system

11. Apply oil to the input shaft bearing cones, and install the input shaft assembly into the housing by inserting the input end through the front opening in housing until the 54T gear can be lowered into the housing.

12. Apply a thin bead of LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the shoulder on the rear bearing cap, and install it using four bolts and lock washers. Apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the bolt threads to seal them to the housing.

13. Install the front bearing cap and the original shim pack using four bolts and lock washers; do not apply sealant until after shimming is completed. If the original shim pack is destroyed, or if all new parts are being used, use a starting shim pack thickness of 0.64 - 0.76 mm (0.025 - 0.030 in).

1411_6_10

8

14. Install a 1/2 in x 3/4 in bolt into the front of the input shaft and use a socket and inch-pound torque wrench to check the input shaft rolling torque. Adjust the input shaft rolling torque by adding or removing shims under the bearing cap to obtain the appropriate rolling torque per the following chart: Output Shaft Rolling Torque 0.23 Nm (2 lb in) 0.34 Nm (3 lb in) 0.45 Nm (4 lb in) 0.57 Nm (5 lb in) 0.68 Nm (6 lb in)

Input Shaft Rolling Torque 0.9 - 1.36 N·m (8 - 12 lb in) 1.24 - 1.7 N·m (11 - 15 lb in) 1.58 - 2 N·m (14 - 18 lb in) 1.9 - 2.4 N·m (17 - 21 lb in) 2.26 - 2.7 N·m (20 - 24 lb in)

NOTE: Rolling torques shown are without shaft seals installed. Do not install shaft seals until after rolling torques are adjusted.

15. After obtaining the correct rolling torque on the input shaft, remove the front bearing cap and apply a thin bead of LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the shoulder to seal the cap to the housing. Apply a small amount of sealant to the end of each retaining bolt to seal it to the housing also.

16. Remove the output shaft bearing cap (1) and apply a thin coat of LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the shoulder of the cap; install the cap on the housing, install the anti-wrap shield (2) and retain with the previously removed hardware. Coat the ends of the bolts with LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant prior to installation to seal them to the housing.

1411_6_11

48068916 04/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 16

9

Product feeding - Header drive system

17. Install the conditioner drive assembly (1) by applying a thin bead of LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACKsealant to the shoulder (2) on the housing, and install it on the gearbox with the idler arm oriented to the 2 o'clock position. Retain the conditioner drive assembly using six bolts and lock washers. Apply LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the bolt threads to seal them to the housing.

18. With the gearbox positioned level, add 1850 mL (62.6 US fl oz) of TUTELA HYPOIDE EP GEAR LUBE SAE 80W-90 or CNH HYPOIDE SSL SYNTHETIC GEAR LUBE 75W-90 (synthetic), which will fill the gearbox to the bottom of the level plug (3).

19. Apply a thin bead of LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant around the top of the bevel gearbox opening; run the sealant over the bolt holes.

20. Install the cover plate (4) and secure with ten bolts and lock washers; the bolts should be installed through the bead of sealant to seal them to the housing.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 17

1411_6_12

10

Product feeding - Header drive system

Bevel gearbox - Install 1. Set the gearbox onto the header frame, inserting the output shaft through the hole in the frame.

NOTICE: The bevel gearbox is heavy and awkward; use caution not to drop the gearbox as personal injury or damage to the gearbox may result.

A3658-18

1

3658-23

2

86080772

3

It will be necessary to install the cutterbar drive shaft over the output shaft of the bevel gearbox during installation; this can be done in two ways: • While lowering the bevel gearbox onto the header frame, have a second person align the cutterbar drive shaft so that it engages on the gearbox output shaft.

• If gearbox is being installed by one person, it will be easier to remove the tower (1) and drive shaft (2) by removing the four 1/2 in x 1-3/4 in bolts and hardened washers. It will be necessary to remove the wear plates, if equipped, from the tower to provide additional clearance when installing the drive shaft.

Install the bevel gearbox onto the header frame, and install the drive shaft and tower by sliding the drive shaft up over the output shaft and position onto the #1 disc.

• Ensure the disc is positioned at right-hand angles to the #2 disc, and torque the four bolts to 113 N·m (83 lb ft).

NOTICE: Install the correct 1/2 in x 1-3/4 in bolts and hardened washers. Use of incorrect disc retaining hardware may cause cutterbar lock-up and potential damage, or may prevent proper retention of #1 disc.

2. Install the five bolts (1) and flat washers to retain the gearbox to the header frame, and torque to 113 N·m (83 lb ft).

48068916 04/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 18

Product feeding - Header drive system

3. Install the shielding (1) by sliding the edge between the lower shield and header frame until the bolt holes line up. Retain the shield using four 5/16 in x 1 in carriage bolts, flat washers and flange nuts at (2) and four 3/8 in x 1 in carriage bolts, flat washers and flange nuts at (3).

1411_6_13A

4

50012123

5

3658-34

6

4. Slide the slip clutch onto the bevel drive gearbox input shaft as far as possible. Install the bolt (1) and lock washer into the slip clutch yoke, and thread it into the end of the shaft.

5. Tighten the bolt as much as possible to pull the slip clutch hub securely onto the tapered end of the gearbox shaft. Install the two bolts (2) and locknuts at the rear of the slip clutch assembly; torque to 87 N¡m (64 lb ft).

NOTE: Do not over-torque; the locknuts are Class C, and are limited to 87 N¡m (64 lb ft).

NOTICE: The slip clutch end of the secondary Power TakeOff (PTO) shaft is very heavy and awkward; use caution not to drop the shaft assembly as personal injury or damage to the Constant Velocity (CV) joint may result.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 19

Product feeding - Header drive system

6. Block the cutterbar to lock up the driveline, and torque the conditioner drive sheave retaining bolt (1) to 397 N¡m (293 lb ft).

3658-34

7

3994-9

8

86080768

9

7. Install the conditioner drive belt over the idler and onto the drive sheave. Connect the tension spring (1) to the idler arm and tighten the nuts to achieve the spring length specified on Header drive belt - Tension adjust (60.120).

8. Install the left-hand end shield if previously removed by positioning it over the mounting bosses and retaining with two bolts and locknuts at (1).

48068916 04/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 20

Index Product feeding - 60 Header drive system - 120 Bevel gearbox - Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13

Bevel gearbox - Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

Bevel gearbox - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18

Bevel gearbox - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

Header drive belt - Replace - Flail conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

Header drive belt - Replace - Roll conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Header drive belt - Tension adjust - Flail conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

Header drive belt - Tension adjust - Roll conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

48068916 04/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 21

48068916 04/11/2016

60.1 [60.120] / 22

Product feeding - 60 Roll conditioning - 620

H7230 H7330

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 1

Contents Product feeding - 60 Roll conditioning - 620

FUNCTIONAL DATA Roll conditioning Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Upper conditioner roll Overview - Roll gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Conditioner roll gearbox Overview - Roll timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

SERVICE Lower conditioner roll Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Upper conditioner roll Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Remove - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Disassemble - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Assemble - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Install - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Tension arm and torsion bar Adjust - Roll pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Conditioner roll gearbox Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 2

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Roll conditioning - Overview The disc mower-conditioner is equipped with two 2591 mm (102 in) chevron, intermeshing rubber conditioner rolls (1) to condition the crop thoroughly, yet gently, for fast drying without leaf loss or crop damage. Cut crop is fed directly from the cutter bar into the conditioner rolls. The conditioner rolls are adjustable for clearance, pressure and timing.

For cane-type crops and abrasive conditions, use the chevron steel rolls.

3996-9

1

3659-19

2

The conditioner rolls are driven from the bevel gearbox (1) through a 4HB banded belt (2) to the conditioner drive gearbox (3).

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 3

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Upper conditioner roll - Overview - Roll gap The rolls should be as close as possible in most conditions but should never touch each other at any point in the rotation of the rolls. Check the clearance with roll pressure applied and rotate the rolls one complete revolution to determine the minimum clearance point.

The roll gap is easily adjusted by raising lock plate (1), swinging it to the side, and rotating bolt (2) on each end of the header. The roll clearance will change approximately 2 mm (0.060 in) per revolution of bolt.

Make sure that you reengage the lock plate (1) after you make the adjustment.

A3658-2N

Under most crop conditions, the roll gap should be maintained as close as possible, usually 0.4 - 3 mm (1/64 1/8 in) for rubber rolls and 5 - 7 mm (0.20 - 0.28 in) for steel rolls.

1

Rubber roll configuration

NOTE: After adjustment, rotate the rolls by hand; they must not touch. Repeat previous procedure if necessary.

Rolls that are touching will cause unit vibration and will wear prematurely.

Check the rolls occasionally for material build-up. Remove accumulations that may be present to prevent roll contact that will reduce conditioning effectiveness.

To check the roll gap easily and quickly in the field, use the 'one stem method'. Take one stem of the crop being cut and pass it between the rolls at three or four points across the roll width. The stem should move between the rolls, but with some resistance. If the stem passes through the gap with little or no resistance, the gap should be reset closer. If you cannot pass the stem between the rolls at all, the gap should be increased slightly. To get peak machine performance and efficiency, check the roll gap before each cutting during the season, and also when cutting different forage crops because each crop will be different.

50051187

2

Steel roll configuration

In high volume crops like Sudan grass and other canetype crops, increase the roll gap slightly to get better crop flow through the rolls without sacrificing good crop conditioning. The lands and valleys should be centered to maintain a uniform distance on all sides of the lands.

NHIL15HT00904AA

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 4

3

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Conditioner roll gearbox - Overview - Roll timing Occasionally check the rolls for proper timing. The lug of one roll should be centered between the two lugs of the opposite roll. The lugs must not touch.

201001520NN

1

To reset the timing, loosen the four 1/2 in bolts (1) on the top roll drive yoke flange. Then, center the top roll lug in the bottom roll lug gap while applying hand force on the lower roll in the direction opposite the normal rotation.

Tighten the four bolts, and then check the timing again by applying reverse rotational force on both rolls.

NOTE: The figure shows conditioner drive belt and idler removed for clarity.

A3662-1NN

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 5

2

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Lower conditioner roll - Remove 1. Raise the header fully and engage the header lift transport locks by pivoting both the right-hand and the lefthand lock levers (1) forward.

86080829

1

86080770

2

A3994-9

3

2. Install the header tilt cylinder pin (1) through the channel slot and the rear hole of the cylinder rod to lock the header in the level position. Lower the header onto the transport locks.

3. Remove the tension on the conditioner roll drive belt by loosening the nuts (1) on the spring tension rod until the belt is loose on the sheaves.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 6

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

4. Remove the divider sheet assembly from the unit by removing the bolt and locknut (1) and six carriage bolts, lock washers, and nuts (2).

NOTE: It may be convenient to remove the swing out shield for better access. To remove the shield, remove the two bolts and locknuts (3) and lift off the shield.

A3659-25

4

3662-4

5

4132-1

6

5. Remove the four bolts (1) and washers that retain the gearbox shaft flange to the lower sheave.

NOTE: Leave one bolt partially threaded in to support the bottom of the gearbox.

6. Remove the bolt (1), three flat washers, and the locknut from the upper gearbox mount.

7. Carefully support the gearbox (2) and remove the remaining lower flange bolt. Pull the gearbox straight away from unit. The upper roll drive shaft will slide apart, allowing gearbox removal.

NOTICE: The conditioner roll gearbox is heavy and awkward. Use caution not to drop the gearbox, as personal injury or damage to the gearbox may result.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 7

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

8. Block the conditioner rolls, using a block between the rolls or a bar through the upper roll universal joint, and loosen the bolt (1) retaining the lower sheave.

19992640

7

19992641

8

19992642

9

9. Leave the bolt in the end of the shaft to protect the shaft, and install a puller (1) to remove the sheave. The sheave is mounted on a tapered spline. Apply force to the sheave using a puller. If necessary, strike the sheave using a rubber mallet or soft-faced hammer.

The sheave should pop off the splines.

10. Clean the shaft thoroughly using emery cloth. Loosen the set screw (1) and remove the lock collar by driving it in the opposite direction of rotation using a hammer and punch. Use a file to remove any marks on the shaft from the lock collar set screw.

11. Support the left-hand end of the conditioner roll using a suitable lift, floor jack, or blocking. Remove the four flange nuts (2) and slide the bearing and housing off the lower conditioner roll shaft.

NOTE: Shaft preparation is very important when removing the locking collar and bearing. Clean it thoroughly with emery cloth and lubricate it to ease bearing removal.

12. Loosen the adjusting bolt to relieve all tension on the right-hand side flotation spring. Remove the cotter pin and slide the clevis pin (3) out of the brackets on the lift arm. Allow the flotation spring (4) to lay back against the right-hand side tire.

NOTE: Removing the flotation spring will provide improved access to the right-hand side of the lower conditioner roll to ease removal.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 8

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

13. Remove the plates (1) on the removal slot at the righthand side of header by removing the two bolts (2).

A5049-4

10

19992643

11

36080838

12

14. Loosen the set screw and remove the lock collar (1) by driving it in the opposite direction of rotation using a hammer and punch.

15. Clean any rust, dirt, or corrosion off the shaft using emery cloth, and file down any marks from the locking collar set screw. Support the lower conditioner roll using a suitable lift, floor jack, or appropriate blocking.

Remove the four flange nuts (2) and slide the bearing and housing off the shaft. Note that the top rear bolt on the right-hand side of the header is loose (not welded to header) and should also be removed.

NOTE: Removing the top rear bolt on the right-hand side of the header eases removal of the upper roll pivot arm.

16. Slide the right-hand end of the roll to the rear, out of the slot in header frame, and lower to the ground using a suitable lift or floor jack to support the conditioner roll.

While supporting the left-hand end of the conditioner roll, slide the roll to the right, until the left-hand end of the conditioner roll is clear of the header frame, and lower it to the ground.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 9

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Lower conditioner roll - Install 1. Position the lower conditioner roll behind the unit, with the long-splined shaft on the left-hand side. Using a suitable lift or floor jack to support the conditioner roll, lift the conditioner roll up and slide the long-splined shaft through the bearing hole on the left-hand side of the header frame.

2. Slide the right-hand end of the conditioner roll through the slot in the frame into the bearing mount area.

36080838

1

19992643

2

1431-7-23

3

3. Slide the bearing housing onto the left-hand side splined shaft. Lift the roll until the bearing housing can be slid over the four bolts in the header frame.

Install lock washers and nuts to retain the housing, and tighten securely.

4. Install the bearing housing on the right-hand side by sliding it over the shaft. Lift the roll until the housing can be slid over the three bolts in the header. Reach in through the slot in the header frame and install the fourth bolt through the frame and housing. Install lock washers and nuts on all four mounting bolts (1) and tighten securely to retain the bearing housing.

5. The lower conditioner roll must be properly aligned with the upper conditioner roll so that the conditioner rolls can be timed. Slide the lower conditioner roll in the bearings until the lugs at the center of the rolls are perfectly aligned. Once the rolls are aligned, check at both ends of the lower conditioner rolls to ensure there is a relatively even amount of clearance between the roll and header frame at both sides.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 10

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

6. Install the lock collar onto the shaft (1) and seat it over the bearing flange. Tighten the lock collar in the direction of rotation using a hammer and punch, and tighten the set screw to secure the lock collar. Repeat for the opposite end of the conditioner roll.

19992643

4

A5049-4

5

19992631

6

7. Install the plates to cover the slot in the header frame (1) using the two previously removed bolts. Tighten securely.

8. Install the flotation spring by aligning the lower spring mount with the brackets on the lift arm. Insert the clevis pin, flat washer (1) and retain using a cotter pin (2). Ttighten the flotation spring as required to provide correct header flotation on the right-hand side of the header.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 11

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

9. Slide the drive sheave (1) over the left-hand end of the conditioner roll shaft (2) and install the thick flat washer and 3/4 in x 2 in bolt (3). Block the conditioner rolls, using a block between the rolls, or a bar through the upper roll universal joint.

10. Torque the bolt to 397 N¡m (293 lb ft) and then drive the sheave onto the shaft using a deadblow or softfaced hammer. Torque the bolt again. Repeat this process until the bolt no longer loosens up when the sheave is struck.

19992640

7

3662-1

8

3662-4

9

NOTICE: The conditioner roll gearbox is heavy and awkward. Failure to properly lift the component could result in machine damage.

11. The conditioner roll gearbox is easier to install if one person holds the gearbox up to the side of the unit while a second person installs the retaining hardware.

12. Lift the conditioner roll gearbox up to the side of the unit and rest the lower shaft flange inside the lower roll sheave.

13. Slip the bolt (1) through the upper gearbox mount to support the gearbox.

14. Rotate the lower roll until the holes in the sheave line up with the holes in the lower shaft flange on the gearbox, and install the four bolts (1) and washers. Remove the upper mount bolt, and install it through a washer, the gearbox mount, washer, frame mount, washer and locknut.

15. Torque the lower retaining bolts to 113 N¡m (83 lb ft).

Tighten the upper mount bolt to remove play in the mount. Do not tighten excessively

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 12

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

16. Connect the upper roll drive shaft by aligning the master splines and sliding the two half shafts together.

17. Position the yoke flange to the upper shaft in the gearbox and install the bolts (1) and washers. Do not tighten the hardware.

3659-36

10

50051187A

11

NHIL15HT00904AA

12

18. Check the conditioner rolls for proper timing. The lug of one roll should be centered between the two lugs of the opposite roll, as shown. The lugs must not touch.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 13

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

19. Set the timing by ensuring the upper roll drive shaft yoke flange bolts (1) are loose. Center the top roll lug in the bottom roll lug gap while applying hand force on the lower roll in the direction opposite the normal rotation. Tighten the four bolts, and then check the timing by applying reverse rotational force on both rolls.

3659-36

13

19992645

14

3994-9

15

NOTE: The figure at right-hand shows the slotted yoke flange (1) on the upper gearbox shaft removed from the machine.

20. Position the conditioner drive belt on the sheaves and tighten the nuts (1) on the spring tension rod to tension spring to a length specified in Header drive belt Tension adjust (60.120).

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 14

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

21. Install the divider sheet assembly using a bolt and locknut (1) and six carriage bolts, lock washers, and nuts (2). If the left-hand swing out shield was removed, install it on the unit using two bolts and locknuts at (3).

A3659-25

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 15

16

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Upper conditioner roll - Remove 1. Remove the lower conditioner roll. See Lower conditioner roll - Remove (60.620).

2. Remove the drive shaft from the left-hand side of the upper conditioner roll by removing the two clamp bolts (1) and nuts at the end of the drive shaft. Slide the yoke off of the upper conditioner roll shaft and remove the drive shaft from the unit.

19992640

1

A5046-7

2

3658-2

3

3. The right-hand side pivot arm (1) must be removed in order to remove the roll. Start by removing the roll gap bolt (2) by removing the nut (3) on the bottom of the bolt.

4. Raise the lock plate (1) and swing it to the side. Lift the adjusting nut (2) and bolt out of the header.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 16

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

5. Completely loosen the roll pressure tension by rotating the roll pressure handle (1) counterclockwise until loose.

3658-3

4

A5046-7

5

A5046-3

6

6. Remove the bolt (1) and spacer that connect the roll tension arm straps (2) to the pivot arm.

7. Loosen the set screw and rotate the lock collar (3) opposite direction of roll rotation. Remove lock collar.

8. Support the roll using a suitable lift or floor jack and appropriate blocking. Remove the pivot nut (1) and bolt at the rear of the pivot plate, and swing plate downwards so that it is clear of the pivot mount. Slide the pivot plate and bearing off the end of the roll.

NOTE: The top rear bolt that retains the right-hand side lower conditioner roll bearing is removable to allow removal of the upper roll right-hand side pivot arm.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 17

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

9. Lower the right-hand side of roll through slots (1) in header frame and out of frame.

19992647

7

19992648

8

10. Slide the left-hand end out of the bearing. Back the roll out of the frame and lower it to the ground.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 18

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Upper conditioner roll - Install 1. Position the upper conditioner roll behind the unit, with the hex shaft on the left-hand side. Using a suitable lift or floor jack to support the conditioner roll, lift the left-hand end of the conditioner roll up and slide the hex shaft through the bearing in the left-hand side pivot arm.

NOTE: Thoroughly clean the shaft ends with emery cloth and lubricate them to ease installation into the bearings.

19992648

1

19992647

2

A5046-3

3

2. Use a suitable lift or floor jack and blocking to lift the right-hand end of the upper conditioner roll up and slide it through the slot (1) in the frame into the bearing mount area. Lift the roll up into position in the header frame.

3. Slide the pivot arm and bearing assembly (1) far enough over the right-hand end of the conditioner roll so that it may be pivoted up into its mounting bracket.

Ensure the pivot bushing is installed in the pivot arm, and swing the pivot arm up in place. Install the carriage bolt and nut to retain the pivot arm.

NOTE: Thoroughly clean the shaft ends with emery cloth and lubricate them to ease installation into the bearings.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 19

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

4. Install the roll gap bolt (1) down through the header frame and through the pivot arm. Install the locknut (2) on the roll gap bolt, threading it on as far as possible to ensure the pivot arm is securely engaged on the square shank of the roll gap bolt.

A5046-7

4

1431-7-20

5

A5046-7

6

5. Center the upper conditioner roll evenly in the header frame, so that there is an equal amount of clearance (1) between the ends of the conditioner roll (2) and header side sheets by sliding the roll in the bearings as required.

6. Install the lock collar (1) onto the right-hand shaft and seat it over the bearing flange. Tighten the lock collar in the direction of rotation using a hammer and punch, and tighten the set screw to secure the lock collar.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 20

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

7. Install the upper conditioner roll drive shaft (1) by sliding the clamp yokes over the conditioner roll shaft and gearbox shaft. Install the two bolts and nuts in each yoke (2) and torque to 46 N¡m (34 lb ft).

8. Install the lower conditioner roll. See Lower conditioner roll - Install (60.620).

A5045-3

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 21

7

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Upper conditioner roll - Remove - Drive shaft 1. Remove the conditioner roll drive shaft by removing the bolts (1) that secure it to the conditioner roll gearbox shaft, and the two clamp bolts (2) from the yoke attached to the conditioner roll.

2. Slide the yoke off of the conditioner roll shaft and remove the drive shaft.

A3659-36N

1

14118-5N

2

3. The drive shaft can be slid apart, and each end serviced separately.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 22

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Upper conditioner roll - Disassemble - Drive shaft 1. Remove the internal snap rings (1) from the universal joint using pliers. Remove the grease fitting (2) from one bearing cap before you remove the snap ring.

NOTE: The grease zerk (2) is oriented to line up with other grease zerks on the drive line. Note the positioning of the grease zerk prior to removal.

14118-6N

1

14118-7N

2

14118-8N

3

2. Position the joint in an open vise, with each ear of one yoke supported by a vise jaw.

3. With a soft hammer or mallet, strike the top ear of the unsupported yoke. This will drive the top bearing cap outward approximately 8 mm (1/4 in).

NOTICE: Do not use a hard faced hammer, as this may damage the edge of the bearing cap bore in the yoke or the snap ring groove area, causing the bearing cap to hang-up or seize in the yoke.

4. Pull the bearing out of the yoke ear. If necessary, grip the loosened bearing in a vise, and drive the yoke off the bearing by striking yoke ear with the soft-faced hammer or mallet.

5. This same procedure should be followed to remove the bearing directly opposite the one just removed, after which the yoke itself may be removed.

6. To remove the remaining two bearings, support the cross in the vise, making certain the vise jaws are covered with brass protectors or the previously removed bearings are reinstalled on the cross. By striking the yoke ear (1), the bearings can be removed as per Steps 3 and 4.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 23

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Upper conditioner roll - Assemble - Drive shaft 1. To reassemble universal joints, start one bearing in yoke ear and position center cross (1) through yoke.

Insert the opposite bushing into the yoke ear, and position the assembly in a vise. Press the bearings in until they are flush with the edge of the yoke.

14118-9N

1

14118-10N

2

14118-11N

3

2. Using a socket of the same diameter as the bearing, press the bearing down far enough to expose the snap ring groove. Install the snap ring in the yoke ear (1).

NOTE: A special snap ring is used to provide clearance around the grease fitting.

3. Reposition the yoke and cross in the vise, and use the socket to press the second bearing into the yoke while rotating the cross to ensure it does not bind up. Continue to press the bearing into the yoke until the snap ring can be installed. It may be necessary to push the bearing in as far as possible with the vise, and then remove the yoke assembly and strike the yoke ears with a sharp blow from a hammer to spring the yoke enough to install the snap ring.

4. Assemble the second yoke, repeating Steps 1 through 3.

NOTE: The grease fitting (1) is oriented to line up with other grease fittings (2) on the driveline. Note the positioning of the bearing for the grease fitting during reassembly.

5. After complete assembly of the universal joint, strike the forged surfaces of all yoke ears with a sharp blow from a hammer. This will ensure proper seating of the bearings, and eliminate any possible tightness to ensure a free flexing joint.

NOTICE: Use caution not to strike the bearing bore area of the yoke, as this will damage the bore and may cause premature cross bearing failure.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 24

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Upper conditioner roll - Install - Drive shaft 1. Connect the upper roll drive shaft by aligning the master splines and sliding the two half shafts together. Position the yoke flange to the upper shaft in the gearbox and install the bolts (1) and washers. Do not tighten the hardware.

A3659-36N

1

50020722N

2

A3659-36N

3

2. Check the conditioner rolls for proper timing. The lug of one roll (1) should be centered between the two lugs (2) of the opposite roll, as shown. The lugs must not touch.

(A) Rubber roll configuration 3. Set the timing by ensuring the upper roll drive shaft yoke flange bolts (1) are loose. Center the top roll lug in the bottom roll lug gap while applying hand force on the lower roll in the direction opposite the normal rotation.

Tighten the bolts, and then check the timing again by applying reverse rotational force on both rolls.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 25

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

NOTE: Figure 4 shows the slotted yoke flange (1) on the upper gearbox shaft removed from the machine.

19992645

4

A3994-9N

5

A3659-25N

6

4. Position the conditioner drive belt on the sheaves and tighten the nuts (1) on the spring tension rod to tension spring to a length of (A) specified in Header drive belt - Tension adjust (60.120) between the hooks.

5. Install the divider sheet assembly using a bolt and locknut (1) and carriage bolts, lock washers, and nuts (2).

If the left-hand swing out shield was removed, install it on the unit using bolts and locknuts at (3).

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 26

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Tension arm and torsion bar - Adjust - Roll pressure 1. Adjust the roll pressure with the crank (1). Turn the crank clockwise to increase the roll pressure. Apply only sufficient pressure to crack the stems, with minimal damage to the leaves. Overconditioning will result in leaves over-drying and shattering, increased power requirements, and increased driveline wear.

2. Latch the handle clip into retainer notch (2).

A3658-3N

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 27

1

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Tension arm and torsion bar - Remove Left-hand side 1. Completely loosen the roll pressure tension by rotating the roll pressure handle (1) counterclockwise until loose.

A3658-3N

1

A5045-3N

2

19992649N

3

19992650N

4

2. Loosen and remove the bolts (1) and spacer from the left-hand side roll tension arm straps to the left-hand upper roll pivot arm. Lower the tension arm down onto the roll pivot arm (2).

3. Loosen the retaining bolt and move the plate (3) at the rear of the left-hand side roll tension arm downwards.

Remove the tension arm.

4. If the bushing remains, remove to free torsion bar (1).

5. Grip the left-hand side torsion bar tightly. Use a pair of locking pliers to shift the torsion rod out of the center adjusting tube and the tension arm. It may be necessary to apply penetrating fluid to loosen the hex ends of the torsion arms (1).

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 28

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

6. The left-hand side tension arm may now be removed.

Remove the snap ring (1) and washer (2) on the inner end of the tension arm hub, and slide the tension arm out of the header frame. If the bushing in the header frame is worn or galled, use a hammer and punch to drive the bushing out of the header frame.

1431-7-28N

5

A5049-3N

6

Right-hand side 1. In order to remove the right-hand side roll tension system components, the left-hand side torsion bar must be removed. Refer to Steps 1 to 5.

2. Loosen and remove the bolts (1) and spacers from the right-hand side roll tension arm straps to the upper roll pivot arm. Lower the tension arm (2) down onto the roll pivot arm.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 29

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

3. Loosen the bolt and locknut (1) that pinches the two mount straps against the adjusting handle assembly, and remove the handle assembly (2).

A3659-15N

7

19992646N

8

A5049-3N

9

4. To remove the right-hand side roll tension system components, the swathgate must be removed. Remove the baffle (1) at the right-hand end of the swathgate by removing the carriage bolts and nuts.

5. Remove the cotter pin and washers at each end of the swathgate where it fits through the header frame (1).

Slide the swathgate to the right-hand so that the swathgate handle disengages from the adjusting quadrant and the left-hand end slips out of the header frame.

Lower the left-hand end so that the swathgate slide to the left-hand to remove the right-hand end from the header. Set the swathgate aside.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 30

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

6. Remove the groove pin (1) at the inner end of the adjusting tube by driving it out of the tube.

1431-7-33N

10

1431-7-34N

11

1431-7-35N

12

7. Slide the adjusting tube (1) inwards until the outer end comes off the right-hand side tension arm hub. If the torsion bar does not fully slide out of the right-hand side tension arm, loosen the retaining bolt on the right-hand side pivot arm, and pivot the plate downwards. Use a hammer and punch to drive the torsion bar inwards out of the tension arm. Tip the outer ends of the adjusting tube and torsion bar assembly (1) down and to the rear of the machine until it can be slid outwards and out of the inside mount on the header frame.

8. Slide the torsion bar out of the adjusting tube.

9. The right-hand side tension arm may now be removed.

Remove the snap ring (1) and washer (2) on the inner end of the tension arm hub, and slide the tension arm out of the header frame. If the bushing in the header frame is worn or galled, use a hammer and punch to drive the bushing out of the header frame.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 31

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Tension arm and torsion bar - Install Right-hand side 1. Install a new bushing in the header frame by driving it in flush with the tube. Apply LOCTITEÂŽ 767 anti-seize compound to the bushing inner surface and the tension arm shaft, and insert the tension arm through the frame.

Retain with a washer (1) and snap ring (2).

1431-7-35N

1

1431-7-34

2

1431-7-33

3

2. Install a washer over the inner end of the adjusting tube.

Apply LOCTITEÂŽ 767 anti-seize compound to the hex bores of the adjusting tube (1) and the right-hand side tension arm.

3. Apply LOCTITEÂŽ 767 anti-seize compound to the ends of the torsion bar, and slide it into the adjusting tube.

Insert the inner end of the adjusting tube through the swathgate quadrant bracket (2) and lift it up in line with the tension arm.

4. Carefully slide the adjusting tube and torsion bar against the tension arm, so that the torsion bar is seated in the tension arm hex bore and the adjusting tube is seated over the tube in the header frame.

5. Slide the washer (1) against the swathgate quadrant bracket, and drive a groove pin (2) through the adjusting tube to secure it in position. Drive the roll pin slowly to ensure it exits through the hole in the opposite side of the adjusting tube.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 32

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

6. Swing the retaining clip up over the end of the torsion bar and tighten the bolt (1). Lift the tension arm up until the tension straps (2) are aligned with the bushing in the upper roll pivot arm. Install the bolt and tighten securely.

A5049-3

4

A3659-15N

5

A3659-14N

6

7. Attach the adjusting handle assembly to the adjusting tube by inserting the pivot nut (1) between the straps on the tube so that it engages in the holes. Install the bolt and locknut (2) and tighten the locknut to draw the straps up enough to capture the pivot nut.

8. Reinstall the swathgate by inserting the right-hand end through the header frame. Lift the left-hand end up to align with the hole in the header frame, and slide the swathgate to the left-hand until the adjusting handle clip engages a notch in the quadrant bracket (1). Install washers on the left-hand end of the swathgate tube, so that with the cotter pin installed, the swathgate cannot move to the right, allowing the adjusting handle to disengage from its notch. Once the washers and cotter pin are installed on the left-hand side, install washers to take up the clearance on the right-hand side, and install a cotter pin to secure.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 33

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

9. Reinstall the swathgate baffle (1) on the right-hand end of the swathgate using the four previously removed carriage bolts and nuts. Insert the carriage bolts up through the swathgate.

1999264N

7

1431-7-28

8

A5044-16

9

Left-hand side 1. Install a new bushing in the header frame by driving it in flush with the tube. Apply permanent lubricant to the bushing inner surface and the tension arm shaft, and insert the tension arm through the frame. Retain with a washer (1) and snap ring (2).

2. Apply a permanent lubricant to the hex bores of the adjusting tube and the tension arm (1). Apply LOCTITEÂŽ 767 anti-seize compound to the ends of the torsion bar, and slide it through the tension arm until the inner end engages in the adjusting tube. Continue to slide the torsion bar in until it is fully seated in the tension arm.

Swing the retaining clip (2) up over the end of the torsion bar and tighten the bolt. Lift the tension arm up until the tension straps (3) are aligned with the bushing in the upper roll pivot arm. Install the bolt and tighten securely.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 34

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

3. Adjust the roll tension to a starting point by rotating the adjusting handle (1) clockwise until all slack is taken up, and then apply eight additional turns. Reengage the retaining clip in the notch (2) in the header frame.

A3658-3N

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 35

10

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Conditioner roll gearbox - Remove 1. Drain oil by removing the bottom plug (1) on the conditioner roll gearbox. The oil will drain faster if the top plug is removed from the gearbox.

NOTE: Figure shows shielding removed for clarity.

A3659-29N

1

A3994-9

2

A3659-25

3

2. Remove the tension on the conditioner roll drive belt by loosening the nuts (1) on the spring tension rod until the belt is loose on the sheaves.

3. Remove the divider sheet assembly from the unit by removing the bolt and locknut at (1) and carriage bolts, lock washers and nuts at (2).

NOTE: It may be convenient to remove the left-hand end swing out shield for better access. To remove the shield, remove the bolts and lock nuts at (3) and lift off the shield.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 36

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

4. Remove the bolts (1) and washers that retain the gearbox shaft flange to the lower sheave.

NOTE: Leave one bolt partially threaded in to support bottom of gearbox.

A3662-4N

4

A4132-1N

5

5. Remove the bolt (1), the three flat washers, and the locknut from the upper gearbox mount.

6. Carefully support gearbox (2) and remove the remaining lower flange bolt. Pull the gearbox straight away from the unit; the upper roll drive will slide apart allowing gearbox removal.

NOTICE: The conditioner roll gearbox is heavy and awkward; use caution not to drop the gearbox as personal injury or damage to the gearbox may result.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 37

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Conditioner roll gearbox - Disassemble 1. Clean off the gearbox prior to disassembly.

2. Place the gearbox on a large flat surface with the cover side upwards. Remove the bolts and the cupped lock washers, and pry off the cover. Note the positions of the supports (1) before removing the cover.

201001474N

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 38

1

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

201001481N

2

3. Remove the cotter pins, the castellated nuts (1), and the hardened washers from the shafts.

4. Lift the gears (2) off of the shafts.

5. Thread the nuts back on to the ends of the shaft to protect the threads. Position the gearbox housing in a press, and push the gearbox shafts out of the bearing cones.

6. Remove the shaft seals and bearing cups from the gearbox case.

14118-2N

3

14118-3N

4

7. Use a split bearing puller to capture the bearing cones (1) on the shafts, and press the shafts out of the bearing cones.

8. Inspect the bearing cups and cones for damage. Inspect seal surfaces on shafts for damage; repair any nicks or scratches using crocus cloth. Replace the shaft if damage cannot be polished out. Inspect splines on shaft for evidence of wear or damage; replace if necessary.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 39

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Conditioner roll gearbox - Assemble 1. Thoroughly clean the gearbox housing, taking care to remove all old sealant on cover mounting flange. Install the bearing cups into the housing with the cups facing outwards from bore. Firmly seat the bearing cups against the shoulders in housing.

2. Install the shaft seal (1) into the housing so that the outer face of the seal is flush with the outer face of the housing.

3. Pack a new bearing cone with NEW HOLLAND AMBRA GR-9 MULTI-PURPOSE GREASE, and then press the bearing onto the shaft, seating it against the shoulder.

14118-4N

4. Apply NEW HOLLAND AMBRA GR-9 MULTI-PURPOSE GREASE to the lip on the shaft seal. Install the shaft assembly through the seal, taking care not to damage it. Pack a new bearing cone with grease, and install it over the shaft. Press it down into the bearing cup until the bearing cone is almost fully seated.

1

5. Install a gear onto the shaft splines, and install a hardened washer and castellated nut onto shaft. Tighten the nut to seat the bearing cone into the cup and obtain 0.45 - 1.13 N·m (4 - 10 lb in) rolling torque on shaft.

First Shaft Rolling Torque N·m (lb in) 0.45 N·m (4 lb in) 0.57 N·m (5 lb in) 0.68 N·m (6 lb in) 0.79 N·m (7 lb in) 0.9 N·m (8 lb in) 1.02 N·m (9 lb in) 1.13 N·m (10 lb in)

Second Shaft Rolling Torque N·m (lb in) 0.9 - 1.58 N·m (8 - 14 lb in) 1.02 - 1.7 N·m (9 - 15 lb in) 1.13 - 1.8 N·m (10 - 16 lb in) 1.24 - 1.9 N·m (11 - 17 lb in) 1.36 - 2.03 N·m (12 - 18 lb in) 1.47 - 2.15 N·m (13 - 19 lb in) 1.58 - 2.26 N·m (14 - 20 lb in)

6. Install the other shaft in the same manner as the first.

The shaft and gear do not need to be indexed, or timed to one another. Tighten the nut to seat the bearing and set the rolling torque on the second shaft to 0.45 - 1.13 N·m (4 - 10 lb in) plus the rolling torque value obtained on the first shaft, as per the table.

7. Clean and degrease the mating surfaces of the gearbox housing and cover to provide proper sealant adhesion. Apply a thin bead of LOCTITE® SI 598™ BLACK sealant to the mating surface of the gearbox housing; the sealant bead should be continuous and inside the bolt pattern.

NOTE: Do not apply an excessive amount of sealant.

8. Install the cover onto the gearbox. Position the four supports (1) as shown, and install the bolts and washers. Torque the bolts to 25 N·m (18 lb ft). Wipe off any excess sealant.

201001474N

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 40

2

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

Conditioner roll gearbox - Install The conditioner roll gearbox is easier to install if one person holds the gearbox up to the side of the unit, while the second person installs the retaining hardware.

1. Lift the assembled conditioner roll gearbox up to the side of the unit, and rest the lower shaft flange inside the lower roll sheave.

NOTICE: The conditioner roll gearbox is heavy and awkward; use caution not to drop the gearbox as personal injury or damage to the gearbox may result.

2. Slip the bolt (1) through the upper gearbox mount to support the gearbox.

A3662-1NNNN

1

A3662-4N

2

A3659-36N

3

Rotate the lower roll until the holes in the sheave line up with the holes in the lower shaft flange on the gearbox, and install the bolts (1) and washers. Remove the upper mount bolt, and install it through a washer, the gearbox mount, washer, frame mount, washer, and locknut.

3. Torque the lower retaining bolts to 113 N¡m (83 lb ft).

Tighten the upper mount bolt to remove play in the mount; do not tighten excessively.

4. Connect the upper roll drive shaft by aligning the master splines and sliding the two half shafts together. Position the yoke flange to the upper shaft in the gearbox, and install the bolts (1) and washers; do not tighten the hardware.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 41

Product feeding - Roll conditioning

5. Check the conditioner rolls for proper timing. The lug of one roll (1) should be centered between the two lugs (2) of the opposite roll. The lugs must not touch.

6. Set the timing by ensuring the upper roll drive shaft yoke flange bolts (1), Figure 3, are loose. Center the top roll lug in the bottom roll lug gap while applying hand force on the lower roll in the direction opposite normal rotation. Tighten the bolts, then recheck the timing by applying reverse rotational force on both rolls.

50020722N

4

A3659-25

5

A3994-9N

6

(A) Rubber Roll Configuration 7. Install the divider sheet assembly using a bolt and locknut at (1) and carriage bolts, lock washers and nuts at (2). If the left-hand side swing out shield was removed, install it on the unit using bolts and locknuts at (3).

8. Position the conditioner drive belt on the sheaves, and tighten the nuts (1) on the spring tension rod to tension spring (2) to a length specified in Header drive belt Tension adjust (60.120).

9. Fill the gearbox with 200 ml (7 US fl oz) of TUTELA HYPOIDE EP GEAR LUBE SAE 80W-90 or CNH HYPOIDE SSL SYNTHETIC GEAR LUBE 75W-90 (synthetic).

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 42

Index Product feeding - 60 Roll conditioning - 620 Conditioner roll gearbox - Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40

Conditioner roll gearbox - Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

38

Conditioner roll gearbox - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

41

Conditioner roll gearbox - Overview - Roll timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

Conditioner roll gearbox - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

36

Lower conditioner roll - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

Lower conditioner roll - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

Roll conditioning - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Tension arm and torsion bar - Adjust - Roll pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27

Tension arm and torsion bar - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32

Tension arm and torsion bar - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28

Upper conditioner roll - Assemble - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24

Upper conditioner roll - Disassemble - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23

Upper conditioner roll - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19

Upper conditioner roll - Install - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25

Upper conditioner roll - Overview - Roll gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

Upper conditioner roll - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16

Upper conditioner roll - Remove - Drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 43

48068916 04/11/2016

60.2 [60.620] / 44

Product feeding - 60 Flail conditioning - 630

H7230 H7330

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 1

Contents Product feeding - 60 Flail conditioning - 630

FUNCTIONAL DATA Flail conditioning Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Flail drive system Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 General information - High speed rotor kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Flail system Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Conditioning hood Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 General information - Dimpled hood liner kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

SERVICE Flail system Replace - Flails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Remove - Rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Install - Rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Conditioning hood Remove - Hood liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Install - Hood liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 2

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

Flail conditioning - Overview The flail conditioning system consists of a single fixed-mounting rotor assembly that carries individual free swinging cast flails and an adjustable conditioning hood. As the crop passes through the opening between the rotor and the hood, the action of the crop rubbing against the flails, the conditioning hood, and other crop material combines to scuff the crop stems, stripping the waxy coating from the stem and allowing moisture to escape. Conditioning level is determined by the amount of clearance between the flails and conditioning hood, flail rotor speed and the type of hood liner. Moving the hood closer to the flails increases the conditioning. Moving the hood away from the flails decreases conditioning.

The conditioning hood pivots at the front, reducing the potential for plugging as the crop is fed from the cutterbar to the rotor assembly. For hard-to-condition crops, the standard smooth hood liner can be replaced with a dimpled hood liner. The dimpled hood liner gives increased conditioning aggressiveness. Flail rotor speed can also be changed from 730 RPM to 1000 RPM to optimize the conditioning aggressiveness with the crop being harvested.

19988032

1

19982284

2

Conditioner setup For grass crops, set the conditioner hood at the midpoint in the adjustment range, with the flail rotor speed set as it comes from the factory. If the crop shows little or no scuffing, adjust the hood closer to the maximum setting (closer to the flails), which will increase conditioning. If the crops show excess conditioning, adjust hood closer to the minimum setting (farther from the flails). If you reach the maximum setting with the smooth liner and conditioning is still not adequate, change to the dimpled liner and readjust to the minimum setting. This will give you a more aggressive range of adjustments and should provide good crop conditioning for those hard-to-condition crops.

Use the same initial settings for legumes as those for grass crops, but check the effects of conditioning more often, adjusting as necessary to minimize leaf bruising.

The dimpled liner is not recommended for legume crops because it is too aggressive even when set at the minimum point.

Properly conditioned crop Flail-conditioned crops look different from roll-conditioned crops. Because the flail conditioning system doesn't crack the stems, it is more difficult to see if the waxy coating on the plant stem was scuffed. Inspect the stems closely. You will see the areas where the stem appears flat and dull, compared to the more glossy appearance of the rest of the plant. These dull areas are where the waxy coating of the plant has been scuffed and disturbed.

With flail conditioning in grass crops, leaf bruising is not seen as often as with legume hays. If using a flail conditioner in legume crops, look for the same leaf bruising signs as discussed with roll conditioning. Again, you should see no more than 5 % leaf damage in properly conditioned crops.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 3

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

Flail conditioning and crop types Grass-type hay crops Flail conditioning was originally designed for grass-type hay crops comprised mostly of leaf sheaths, where higher crop volumes are more common. Where grass hays are the primary crop, the NEW HOLLAND flail conditioning system offers faster dry down rates and reduces the potential for weather damage, while still providing the ability to make high quality hay.

Legume hay crops A flail conditioner can be used for legume hays with one reservation. Over-conditioning can easily occur in legume forage crops because the plant is more succulent than grass-type crops. It's important to check the machine performance more often and adjust the conditioning hood as needed to prevent over-conditioning and excessive leaf damage to the crop.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 4

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

Flail drive system - Overview Conditioner belt The conditioner belt must be properly tensioned at all times to prevent excessive slipping. A loose belt may cause conditioner to wrap or plug.

50051121N

1

The conditioner belt is tensioned by a spring. The belt is properly tensioned when the spring (1) is tightened to a length of (A), specified in Header drive belt - Replace (60.120).

NOTE: The spring length is measured inside hook to hook.

19982126RN

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 5

2

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

Flail drive system - General information - High speed rotor kit The high speed rotor kit is available for more aggressive conditioning. A larger sheave and a 4HB banded v-belt enable the rotor and flails to rotate at a higher rate of speed. The standard rotor speed is 730 RPM . The high speed rotor kit will increase the rotor to 1000 RPM to provide a more aggressive conditioning.

To install the high speed rotor kit: 1. Open the shield door (1).

2. Remove the lower shield (2) by removing the bolts (3).

19982117RN

1

3. Remove the conditioner belt and sheave.

A. Remove the tension on the belt by loosening the nuts (1) on the spring tension rod until the belt can be removed from the upper sheave.

B. Remove the bolts (2) that secure the sheave to the rotor.

C. Remove the belt (3) and the sheave (4).

50050985N

2

50050985N

3

4. Install the new larger sheave (1).

5. Torque the six bolts (2) to 113 N¡m (83 lb ft).

6. Install the new belt by positioning it onto the sheaves.

7. Tighten the nuts on the spring tension rod to tension the spring to a length (A) specified in Header drive belt - Tension adjust (60.120) between the hooks.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 6

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

8. Install the lower shield (1) by installing the bolts (2).

9. Close the shield door (3).

19982117RN

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 7

4

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

Flail system - Overview Flail rotor assembly The disc mower-conditioner utilizes a highly effective, innovative flail conditioning system that consists of a flail rotor assembly and an adjustable conditioning hood.

98-210RN

1

The standard rotor speed is 730 RPM, with an optional high speed rotor kit available that increases the rotor speed to 1000 RPM. The flail rotor has 18 free swinging cast gangs of flails attached to the rotor that feed the crop away from the cutterbar, against the conditioning hood, and discharges the crop into a swath or windrow. The flail shafts are secured to the rotor assembly by one roll pin at the end of each shaft. The casting, which contains five flails, and the shaft are replaceable.

19985255N

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 8

2

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

Conditioning hood - Overview A conditioning hood is placed above the flail rotor assembly to control, condition, and direct the crop into a swath or windrow. The position of the conditioning hood is adjustable by a hand crank (1) to vary the amount of conditioning depending on the crop conditioning requirements.

The most aggressive crop conditioning will occur when the conditioning hood is placed in the lowest position.

19993798

1

Raise the conditioning hood to the highest position for minimum crop conditioning. The conditioning hood has a standard smooth hood liner that is replaceable, rather than having to replace the entire conditioning hood. The smooth hood liner may be removed and a “dimpled� or textured hood liner may be installed for more aggressive crop conditioning.

19982284N

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 9

2

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

Conditioning hood - General information - Dimpled hood liner kit he dimple hood liner kit is available for more aggressive conditioning. This kit includes a dimpled hood liner, which consists of two sections and the hardware to mount the liner to the hood.

To install the dimpled hood liner: 1. Turn the hood crank (1) counterclockwise to lower the hood to the lowest position.

19982112N

1

It may be necessary to remove the down stop spacer and the bolt (1) at the end of the mounting hardware. If so, loosen the hardware and remove the hood liner sections.

19985249

2

19985251

3

2. Secure the front of each hood liner section to the front of the hood using 3/8 in x 3/4 in carriage bolts (1), washers, and flange nuts.

3. Secure the rear of each hood liner section using 3/8 in x 3/4 in carriage bolts (2), washers, and flange nuts.

4. Securely tighten the hardware.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 10

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

1. Install the down stop spacer and bolt (1) at the ends of the rotor hood, if these were removed to gain access to the mounting hardware.

19985249

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 11

4

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

Flail system - Replace - Flails 1. The flail conditioner consists of 20 free swinging cast gangs of flails. Each casting contains five rigid flails and should be replaced if it becomes worn or damaged.

50051123

1

50051122

2

2. The flail castings pivot freely on shafts that are secured to the rotor by a roll pin at one side of the disc.

3. To replace damaged flails, drive out the roll pin (1) with a punch from the shaft (2) and slide the shaft to the side to remove the flails (3) from the rotor. The shaft may be removed completely by sliding the shaft through the notch in the disc.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 12

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

Flail system - Remove - Rotor 1. Raise or remove the rear curtain and remove the side windrow shields.

2. Remove the conditioner drive belt.

3. Remove the metal shielding from the conditioner drive belt and sheave. Remove the two carriage bolts (1) from the rear of the shielding and the six carriage bolts from the front of the shielding (2).

NOTE: It is not necessary to separate the shielding at the angle (3) to remove it.

19982116

1

36080837

2

19982112

3

4. Remove the right-hand and left-hand extender plates from the swathgate (1). Remove the springs (2).

5. Remove the two adjustment shaft attaching bolts (3) from the swathgate using a wrench and hex wrench combination.

6. Slide the swathgate to the left, freeing it from the adjustment handle on the right-hand side of the machine.

Slide it back to the right-hand to free the left-hand side.

Set the swathgate aside.

NOTICE: Keep the swathgate level with the back of the disc mower until both sides are free. Allowing one side to drop before the other is free of the machine can bend and damage the mounting points, making reassembly difficult.

7. Remove the adjustment arm (1).

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 13

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

8. Remove the four semi-circular shields from inside the ends of the frame (1) (two at each end of the rotor).

Each shield section is secured with four carriage bolts, with the bolt heads facing in toward the center of the conditioner rotor.

36080837

4

19990098

5

19992610

6

9. Remove the side shields (1) from the rear of the frame on both sides of the rotor.

NOTE: The side shields include a pair of small deflectors (2). These need not be separated from the side shields for most repairs.

10. Remove the block plate from the right-hand side of the frame.

NOTE: The right-hand side shield removed in step 9 shares two common bolts with the block plate. Always install the block plate when installing the side shield.

11. Remove the drive pulley from left-hand side rotor shaft by removing the six retaining bolts (1).

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 14

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

12. Use a puller to remove the pulley flange from the rotor drive shaft (1).

13. Thoroughly clean the shaft on both sides of the rotor.

Use paint remover and/or emery cloth to remove any paint, scratches, dirt or grit from the shaft. Lubricate the clean shaft with light oil to ease bearing removal and installation.

NOTICE: The shafts must be clean and smooth to remove the retaining collars and bearings. Failure to clean the shafts thoroughly can prevent the bearings from being removed and installed without damage.

19992612

7

19992613

8

19992614

9

14. Remove the locking eccentric collars from both sides of the rotor shaft. Loosen the set screw (1) and drive the collars in the direction opposite normal rotation to loosen them from the shaft.

NOTE: Clean the rotor shaft on both sides with fine grit emery paper or equivalent and apply penetrating oil to ease removal and installation of the collars and bearings.

15. Support the rotor assembly with a suitable lifting device to ease bearing removal. Always support the rotor when the bearings are being removed to avoid personal injury and damage to the machine.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 15

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

16. Remove the bearing housing retaining nuts and pull the bearing and housing assemblies (1) off both sides of the rotor shaft.

19992615

10

19992616

11

19992617

12

17. Use an appropriate puller (1) if necessary to remove the bearing assemblies.

NOTICE: The rotor assembly is heavy and awkward. Failure to properly lift the component could result in machine damage.

18. With a suitable lift or hoist, swing the right-hand side of the rotor out of the frame. Hold the rotor against the left-hand side of the frame while maneuvering the rotor free of the frame and wheel.

19. Carefully back the rotor out of the frame until the lefthand shaft clears the frame and wheel. This will require some angling of the rotor as it is removed to pull the left-hand shaft out of the frame.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 16

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

20. Inspect the rotor and replace any worn or damaged parts. For instructions on removing the flails, see Flail system - Replace - Flails (60.630).

21. The rotor and discs should be straight. Bent discs can cause the rotor to be unbalanced, resulting in vibration or damage to the conditioner hood and rotor components.

22. Bent discs also may prevent the flails from moving freely.

36080834

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 17

13

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

Flail system - Install - Rotor 1. Clean the shafts (1) on both ends of the rotor with emery cloth. Clean and apply a lubricant to the shafts to ease bearing installation.

19990075

1

19992617

2

19992614

3

2. Using a suitable hoist or lift, place the left-hand shaft of the rotor through the opening in the frame (1) on the left-hand side of the machine.

3. Move the rotor into place on the right-hand side of the frame. Hold the rotor against the left-hand side while lifting it past the frame member and wheel as it slides into place.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 18

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

4. Install the bearing assemblies on both sides of the rotor.

Drive the bearings fully onto the shaft (1) and mount the bearing housing on the four bolts as shown (2).

NOTE: Thoroughly clean and lubricate the shaft to ease bearing installation.

19992618

4

19992619A

5

19992613

6

5. The rotor assembly needs to be centered in the trail frame. Measure the distance from the end disc to the side sheet. The measurement should be the same on both sides.

6. With the rotor centered between the frame members, install the retaining collars on both shafts. Rotate each retaining collar on the bearing flangette until it grips the shaft, then tighten the set screw to hold it in place (1).

The collars are eccentric to provide a snug fit prior to tightening the set screw.

NOTICE: The collars should hold the rotor in place, keeping it from shifting off center, without causing binding or damage to the bearings.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 19

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

7. Install the rotor drive flange (1) on the splined shaft on the right-hand side of the rotor.

19992609

7

19992610

8

19990098

9

8. Install the rotor drive pulley on the flange (1).

9. Install and tension the conditioner drive belt.

Header drive belt - Tension adjust (60.120).

See

10. Install the block plate and shield on the right-hand side of the frame (1).

NOTE: Two of the shield mounting bolts are common to the block plate on the right-hand side. The left-hand side block plate is welded into place.

11. Repeat the procedure to install the shield on the lefthand side. If the small windrow deflectors (2) were removed, install them.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 20

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

12. Install the four semicircular shields, two at each end of the rotor (1). Use bolts with the nut and washer facing out to hold them in place.

36080834

10

19982112

11

19992628

12

13. Install the adjustment lever (1).

14. Install the swathgate (1). Slide the swathgate into the left-hand bracket, then onto the lever (2). Use the two set screws and nuts to hold it in place.

NOTICE: Place the washers and spacers in place on the lever shaft to obtain proper spacing of the swathgate on the shaft, and to center it on the rear of the disc mower conditioner.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 21

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

15. Install the extender plates on the ends of the deflector shield (1).

16. Install the springs on the swathgate (2).

36080837

13

86080776

14

86080827

15

17. Install the windrow shields, holding them onto the pivot post with the retaining collar and bolt (1).

18. Install or lower the rear curtain into place. Install the carriage bolt, washers and nuts (1) securing the rear curtain in the mounts on the trail frame.

NOTE: Art for reference only. The rear curtain is in the storage position.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 22

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

Conditioning hood - Remove - Hood liner 1. Turn the hood crank (1) clockwise to set the hood in a middle position.

19982112

1

19992620

2

36080834

3

2. Remove the down stop bolt and spacer (1) at either end of the hood.

3. Turn the hood crank clockwise to set the hood at its lowest position (maximum conditioning). This will allow room to access the rear row of carriage bolts securing the liner.

4. The hood liner consists of two sections. Each liner is held in place with a row of carriage bolts at the top and bottom of the liner.

5. Remove the carriage bolts from the front and rear of each section to remove the liner from the machine.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 23

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

Conditioning hood - Install - Hood liner 1. Secure the front of each hood liner section to front of the hood using carriage bolts, washers, and flange nuts (1) and securely tighten.

19982119

1

36080834

2

19992620

3

2. Install the six bolts (1) in the rear of each section and tighten securely.

3. Install the down stop bolt and spacer (1) at either end of the hood.

4. Lower the hood to the desired conditioning level.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 24

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

Conditioning hood - Remove 1. Turn the hood crank (1) clockwise to set the hood in a middle position.

19982112

1

19992620

2

36080834

3

2. Remove the down stop bolt and spacer (1) at either end of the hood.

3. Turn the hood crank clockwise to set the hood at its lowest position (maximum conditioning). This will allow room to access the rear row of carriage bolts securing the liner.

4. The hood liner consists of two sections. Each liner is held in place with a row of carriage bolts at the top and bottom of the liner.

5. Remove the carriage bolts from the front and rear of each section to remove the liner from the machine.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 25

Product feeding - Flail conditioning

Conditioning hood - Install 1. Turn the hood crank (1) clockwise to set the hood in a middle position.

19982112

1

19992620

2

36080834

3

2. Remove the down stop bolt and spacer (1) at either end of the hood.

3. Turn the hood crank clockwise to set the hood at its lowest position (maximum conditioning). This will allow room to access the rear row of carriage bolts securing the liner.

4. The hood liner consists of two sections. Each liner is held in place with a row of carriage bolts at the top and bottom of the liner.

5. Remove the carriage bolts from the front and rear of each section to remove the liner from the machine.

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 26

Index Product feeding - 60 Flail conditioning - 630 Conditioning hood - General information - Dimpled hood liner kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

Conditioning hood - Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26

Conditioning hood - Install - Hood liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24

Conditioning hood - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

Conditioning hood - Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25

Conditioning hood - Remove - Hood liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23

Flail conditioning - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Flail drive system - General information - High speed rotor kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

Flail drive system - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

Flail system - Install - Rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18

Flail system - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

Flail system - Remove - Rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13

Flail system - Replace - Flails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12

48068916 04/11/2016

60.3 [60.630] / 27

CNH Industrial America New Holland Site 100 Brubaker Avenue New Holland, Pennsylvania United States 17557 SERVICE - Technical Publications & Tools

PRINTED IN U.S.A. Š 2016 CNH Industrial America LLC. All rights reserved. No part of the text or illustrations of this publication may be reproduced.

NEW HOLLAND policy is one of continuous improvement and the right to change prices, specification or equipment at any time without notices is reserved.

All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weight are approximate only and the illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your NEW HOLLAND Dealer.

48068916 04/11/2016 EN

SPECIAL TOOL INDEX Genuine FNH012212 [Disc Cutter Bar Tie Bolt Nut Holding Tool] FNH012213 [Disc Cutter Bar Tie Bolt Socket ] FNH012212 [Disc Cutter Bar Tie Bolt Nut Holding Tool] FNH012213 [Disc Cutter Bar Tie Bolt Socket ] FNH23ET95 [Top Assembly Cover Cap - 600 Series Disc Mower] FNH012212 [Disc Cutter Bar Tie Bolt Nut Holding Tool] FNH012213 [Disc Cutter Bar Tie Bolt Socket ] FNH012213 [Disc Cutter Bar Tie Bolt Socket ] FNH012212 [Disc Cutter Bar Tie Bolt Nut Holding Tool]

Reference

PAGE

Disc cutterbar - Remove

58.1 / 17

Disc cutterbar - Remove

58.1 / 17

Disc cutterbar Disc drive module - Remove

58.1 / 20

Disc cutterbar Disc drive module - Remove

58.1 / 20

Disc cutterbar Disc drive module - Disassemble

58.1 / 21

Disc cutterbar Disc drive module - Install

58.1 / 30

Disc cutterbar Disc drive module - Install

58.1 / 30

Disc cutterbar Disc drive module - Install

58.1 / 30

Disc cutterbar Disc drive module - Install

58.1 / 30

48068916 04/11/2016

CNH Industrial America New Holland Site 100 Brubaker Avenue New Holland, Pennsylvania United States 17557 SERVICE - Technical Publications & Tools

PRINTED IN U.S.A. Š 2016 CNH Industrial America LLC. All rights reserved. No part of the text or illustrations of this publication may be reproduced.

NEW HOLLAND policy is one of continuous improvement and the right to change prices, specification or equipment at any time without notices is reserved.

All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weight are approximate only and the illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your NEW HOLLAND Dealer.

48068916 04/11/2016 EN